The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 3525 - Contract - Armstron Mechanical Company Inc - HVAC Renovation, LIA - 01_10_1991Resolution # 3525 January 10, 1991 Item #27 HW:js RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and Armstrong Mechanical Company, Inc. for HVAC renovation at Lubbock International Airport, attached herewith, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 'ATTEST: neitte boya, uiiy )ecre-Lary (APPROVED S TO CONTENT: II Lam, Geife Ea s, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Harold Willard, Assistant'City Attorney loth day of January B. C. McMIN , MAYOR 1991. Additional Time of Completion is.0 Days . The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is August 3, 1991 WHEREAS, it is desirable to make.chariges in the plans and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material to convert single zone air handlers number 5, 71 and 9 to DDC controls. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 2.5 day of March, 1991.. CONTRACTOR:OWNER: ArmstrongMechanical Co.., Inc. City of Lubbock BY: BY: Cess Deputy City Manager TITLE APPROVED A, TO FORM. p� C' y Attorney ZSj APP VED AS TO CONTENT: ect o Building Services 1� 3 . COPY FOR Yai1RTien JKORAfA CHANGE ORDER NUMBER TWO BID NUMBER 10943 T0: Armstrong Mechanical Co., I'nc. P.O. Box 3430 Lubbock, Texas 79452 ....:,:Original Amount of Contract $ 708,600'.00 Amount Previous Change Orders 3,712.00 Net Amount this Change Order 1,005.10 Amended Amount of Contract.. $ 713,317.10 Percentage Change of Contract Price .is _.14% Additional Time of Completion is 0 Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is August 3, 1991. WHEREAS, it. is desirable to make: -changes in the plans and: specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The.Co.ntractor to furnish all labor and material to make changes as per Attachment A revised. March 7, 1991. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the 'Contractor have hereto se:t, their hands this the 25 day of March, 1991. CONTRACTOR: ;' OWNER: Armstrong Mechanical Co., Inc. City of Lubbock BY: z Nlnq- BY:� Deputy Ci t� Manager TITLE APPROVED AS TO FORM: AP ED AS TO CONTENT: A-c�,C y Attorney ct o Building ervices LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT RENOVATION ARCHITECTURAL SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING "A" COPY Fr °®UR INFOR ATION CHANGE ORDER NUMBER THREE BID NUMBER 10943 TO: Armstrong Mechanical Co., Inc. I P.O. Box 3430 Lubbock, Texas 79452. Original Amount of.Contract 708,600.00 Amount:Previous Change Orders 4,717.10 Net Amount this Change Order, 4,538.00 Amended Amount.of Contract $ 717,855.10 Percentage Change of Contract Price is ..6% Additional Time of Completion is 0 Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of :.this Change Order is August 3, 1991 WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for this project_ THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor, and material_ to convert multi-z:one air handlers #4, 6 and 10 to DDC controls.. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands .this the 25 day of March, 1991. CONTRACTOR: _ OWNER: Armstrong Mechanical Co., Inc. City of Lubbock Deputy City Manager TITLE /q�rl--al'T AP OUED ASJO FORM': A4, City Attorney APPR D AS TO CONTENT: rcto of q3tuilding Services M" M-A Q 3 Sc-a �; CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR RVAC RENOVATION - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT BID # 10943 MAILED TO VENDOR: November 16, 1990 CLOSE: November 29, 1990 at 2:00 p.m. NEW CLOSING DATE: December 6, 1990 at 2:00 p.m. BID # 10943 - HVAC RENOVATION - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT ADDENDUM # 1 1. PLEASE CHANGE THE CLOSING DATE FROM NOVEMBER 29, 1990 TO DECEMBER 6, 1990 AT 2:00 P.M. 2. PLEASE INSERT INTO SPECIFICATIONS CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATION ATTACHED. 3. PLEASE NOTE SPECIFICATION CHANGES ATTACHED. THAN YOU, Apt, Ron Shuffield CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID ^ Item 1: _In the Specifications, Section 152001 page 15200-2, Pas-2 - Products, sub -section 2.01 Materials:, paragraph B, change the steel pipe ASTM designation from A120, A53, A105 to ASTM A 53B. ~ Item 2: In the Specifications, Section 15200, page 15200-2, Part,2 - Products, sub -section 2.01 Materials:, paragraph B, insert the following: PVC Stater Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 Push on Joints for PVC Wate:. Pipe ASTM D1585, AWwA C900 Item 3: In the Specifications, Section 15500, Part 2 - Products, insert subsections 2.20 and 2.21 as follows: _2_20 BOILER VENTING: The contractor shall furnish and install for the new boiler, a 10 ga_ black steel flue extending and connecting to the existing boiler flue in the boiler.room as shown on the drawings. 2.21 FLUE VENTS: Provide and install flue vents from the relocated water ®" heaters. Flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings. Extend new flues and connect to existing flue in the boiler room as shown on the drawings. ^ Itern 4: In the Specifications, Section 15500, Part 2 - Products, subsection 2.04, insert paragraph E as follows: E. Coils which will receive this type of flow measuring device are: 9 existing Unit Heaters -. 24 existing Door Heaters 1 Preheat Coil in Boiler Room 5 Fan Coil units, heating and chilled water 11 Blower Coil units, heating and chilled water Heating water bypass at AHU-3, AHU-11 Chilled water bypass at AHU-3, AHU-11 AHU-4, Zone 1 and 2 - heating water �- AHU-10, Zone 1 and 2 - heating water Item 5: In the Specifications, Section 15500, Part 2 - Products, subsection 2.05, insert paragraph G as follows: G. This type of flow measuring device shall be installed at `- the following: Chilled water system piping, pumps, and chillers as shown on the drawings Heating water system piping, pumps, and boilers as shown on the drawings Cooling Coils at RTU-1 thru RTU-8 Cooling Coils at AHU-4, AHU-51 AHU-6, AHU-7, AHU-9, AHU-10 Heating Coils at AHU-5, AHU-6, AHU-7, AHL*-9 -- Item 6: in the Specifications, Section 15500, Part 2 - Products, subsection 2_16, page 15500-27, insert paragraph-1 as follows: L. Manufacturer shall provide contact closures to close solenoid valve in cooling tower makeup water line when the sand filter switches to backwash mode. Solenoid valve as shown on the drawings is provided by the. mechanical contractor. Item 7: On the drawings, Sheets M-13 thru M-16, note that the ®. mechanical contractor shall install manual balancing dampers in -- each zone duct from the roof mounted air units Balancing dampers shall be installed in the zone duct before the first outlet in that zone. Item 8: On the drawings, Sheet M-20, Heating dater Piping Diagram, the pipe header between the center existing boiler and.new Boiler #1-9Q shall be 10" and not 8". item 9: On the.drawings, Sheet M-20, Heating hater Piping Diagram, the flow measuring devices marked FMb are.all new under Bid Item #2. Item 10: On the drawings, Sheet m1-22, Cooling Tower Basin Plan, the equalizing line between tower basins shall be Schedule 80 PVC. The valves shall be PVC Fall Valves. Item 11: On the drawings, Sheet M-22, Condensing Water Piping Diagram; the flow measuring device (marked FMF) at the existing condensing water pump is existing. Flow measuring devices at CWP #1-90 and CWP #2-90 are new and shall be installed with its associated pump under the appropriate Bid Item. Item 12: On the drawings, Sheet M-22, Cooling Tower Equipment Room Plan, ventilation fan VF #2-90 shall be installed in Bid Item #1. -- Item 13: On the drawings, Sheet M-22, Condensing Water Piping Diagram. The three solenoid valves to each cooling tower in the makeup water line shall be replaced with one solenoid valve in the common piping to the three cooling towers. Tee off from this common piping upstream of the solenoid valve with a 2-I/2" line to the sand filter. The solenoid valve in the common make-up water line to the cooling towers will be provided by the -- mechanical contractor and wired to interlock with the sand filter by the electrical contractor. _ Item 14: On the drawings, Sheet M-22, Cooling Tower Equipment Room Plan, Under Bid Item #1, install butterfly valves at each S" tee from the 141, condenser water headers to Cooling Tower,#1-90 and Cooling Tower 42-90. Provide blind flange after butterfly valve in Cooling Tower #2-90 under Bid Item #1 only to facilitate installation of.Bid Item #2...in_the.future.. Item 15: On the drawings, Sheet M-23, Sand Filter 'Piping Diag-ram. Note that all piping from the sand filter to the tovier basin shall be Schedule 80 PVC with solvent weld fittings. Item 16: On the drawings, Sheet M-24, Unit Heater/Door Heater Piping Diagram, is typical of 24 existing door heaters instead of 23. Item 17: on the drawings, Sheet M-25, the Automatic Control Valve -- Schedule shall be replaced with the enclosed revised Automatic Control. Valve Schedule. AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE SCHEDULE AUTOFLOW UNIT SERVICE GPM SIZE SERIES NO. NC DOOR HEATERS HEATING WATER 18.0 1-1/2" FV-150 UNIT HEATERS HEATING WATER 12.5 1-1/4" FV-125 UNIT HEATERS HEATING WATER 5.7 1" FV-100 _.UNIT HEATER HEATING WATER 4.0 1" FV-100 FAN:COT_L KNITS HEATING WATER 2.0 3/4" FV-075 FAN COIL UNITS CHILLED WATER 3.5 3/4" FV-075 '-" BLOWER COIL (VERT) HEATING WATER 13.0 1-1/4" FV-125 BLOWER COIL (VERT) CHILLED WATER 24:0 2" Fit-200 BLOWER COIL (HORZ) HEATING WATER 18.0 1-1/2" FV-1�0 BLOWER COIL (HORZ) CHILLED WATER 25.0 2" FV-200 PREHEAT COIL HEATING WATER 20.5 2" FV-200 AHU-1 HEATING WATER 68.0 3" BR-300 AHU-1 CHILLED WATER 148.0 3" BR-300 AHU-2 HEATING WATER 60.0 "3" BR-300 AHU-2 CHILLED WATER 130.0 3" BR-300 AHU-3 HFATING WATER 38.0 2" BR-200 AHU-3 CHILLED WATER 95.0 3" BR-300 AHU-3 HEATING BYPASS 10.0 1-1/4" FV-125 AHU-3 CHILLED BYPASS 10.0 1-1/4" FV-125 ^, AHU-4 ZONE 1 HEATING WATER 13.0 1-1/4" FV--125 --AHU-4 ZONE 2 HEATING WATER 25-0 2" FV-200 AHU-4 CHILLED WATER 91.0 3" BR-300 AHU-5 HEATING WATER 100.0 3" BR-300 -" AHU-5 CHILLED WATER 215.0 4" GE-400 AHU-6 HEATING WATER 75.0 3" BR-300 AHU-6 CHILLED WATER 133.0 3" BR-300 AHU-7 HEATING WATER 136.0 3" BR-300 AHU-7 CHILLED WATER 285.0 5" GE-500 AHU-8 HEATING WATER 10.0 1-1/4" BR-125 AHU-8 CHILLED WATER 24.0 23' DR-200 AHU-9 HEATING WATER 103.0 3" BR-300 AHU-9 CHILLED WATER 220.0 4" GE-400 AHU-1.0 ZONE 1 HEATING WATER 13.0 2" FV-200 AHU-10 ZONE 1 HEATING WATER 25.0 1-1/4" FV-125 AHU-10 CHILLED WATER 91.0 3" BR-300 AHU-11 HEATING WATER 38.0 2" BR-200 AHU-11 CHILLED WATER 94.0 3" BR-300 AHU-11 HEATING BYPASS 10.0 1-1/4" FV-125 AHU--11 CHILLED BYPASS 10.0 1-1/4" FV-125 AHU-12 HEATING WATER 60.0 3" BR-300 -" AHU-12 CHILLED WATER 148.0 3" BR-300 RTU-1 HEATING WATER 15.0 2" BR-200 RTU-1 CHILLED WATER 40.0 2" BR-200 RTU-2 HEATING WATER 13.0 2" BR-200 RTU-2 CHILLED WATER 40.0 2" BR-200 RTU-3 HE.ATING WATER 36.0 2" BR-200 RTU-3 CHILLED WATER 110.0 3" BR-300 RTU-4 HEATING WATER 30.0 2" BR-200 °— RTU-4 CHILLED WATER 91.0 3" BR-300 RTU-5 HEATING WATER 48.0 3" BR-300 RTU-5 CHILLE,D WATER 128.0 3" SR-300 RTU-6 HEATING WATER 23.0 2" BR-200 RTU-6 CHILLED WATER 55.0 3" BR-300 RTU-7 HEATING WATER 16.-0 2" BR-200 RTU-7 CHILLED WATER 33.0 2" BR-200 RTU-8 HEATING WATER 48.0 3" BR-300 RTU-8 CHILLED WATER 125.0 3" BR-300 SF#1-90 DOMESTIC WATER 141.0 4" FL-400 .-. SF#2-90 DOMESTIC WATER 43.0 2" BR-200 SFw3-90 DOMESTIC WATER 43.0 2" BR-200 NOTES: 1. Contractor shall verify flow rates and sizes. JtD-c H R. RAPIER, P.E. Consulting Structural Engineer November 13, 1990 TO: Travis Brown, Agnew Storrs & Associates -, HVAC Renovation - Lubbock International Airport Bid #10943 Agdendum #1 ^� Section 03450 - Precast Concrete Facing Panels Part 2 - Products: 2.01 Materials: A. Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I, Buff, Cement as manufactured by Texas Industries, Inc. 2.03 Fabrication: C_ Surface Finish: Color texture and gradation of finished surface shall match sample in Engineer's office/existing adjacent building. Finish shall be on all surfaces exposed to view. Unexposed surfaces shall have smooth as cast or float finish. Finish shall be aed a 7806 indienc Avenue Suite 105 • Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806' 796-0685 +++END+++ Lt1P,fitWK TNTERNiillf? ART. A { hFORT ELFCTRICAL I EM$ Ic(,nt 1: Modify Fite Alaral Zone Schedule to indicates that all RTU'a nre to be connected under Bid Item #2 only. . •�-. v • ,.1. i �i i L.! vC- ' January 8, 1987 Agenda Item '18 DGV:da RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock 'in accordance with.the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February _ 23, 1984; and _ WHEREAS, such rates need to be•_updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of ,per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:. THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made -a part hereof for all intents and purposes: _ Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades �-- Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate —"j Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in r all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. B.C. MCMINN MAYOR ' ;Ranett6—Boyd, City Secretary .•APPROVED TO ONTENT: APPROVED AS TO FORM: r• t� P Bi 1 yne, D rector of Building �Dold G. Vandiver, First L Services Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bri ckl ayer-Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator - Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder - Certified Hourly Rate 8-35 5.50 10.50 5.00 11.00 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5.25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 - 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 ` -r r -r EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft °-' Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher .., Concrete Finisher -Helper El ectri ci an- Flagger Form Setter ^" Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility - Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator ..= Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator. Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light '^I Heavy Hourlv Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 -4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.5D 5.25 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series, 7.25 EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is.l 1/2 times base rate. MAILED TO VENDOR: NOVEMBER 30, 1990 CLOSE: DECEMBER 6, 1990 @ 2:00 PM NEW CLOSE: DECEMBER 18, 1990 @ 2:00 PM BID # 10943 - HVAC.RENOVATION/LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT ADDENDUM # 2 NOTE: PLEASE CHANGE THE CLOSING DATE FROM DECEMBER 6, 1990 TO DECEMBER 18, 1990 AT 2:00 P.M. T YOU, Ron Shuffield CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID. Office of Purchasing City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 806-767-2167 MAILED TO VENDOR: December 13, 1990 CLOSING DATE: December 18, 1990 @ 2:00 P.M. BID # 10943 ADDENDUM # 3 PLEASE NOTE SPECIFICATION CHANGES ATTACHED: THANK YOU, ene Eads, C.P.M. CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original Drawings and Specifications of the above identified project. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum by noting it on your -. Proposal. MECHANICAL Item 1: In the Specifications, page 15500-5, paragraph 2.04.A, note that the Owner is pre -purchasing Trane Model CVHE-320-032L-350-320 centrifugal water chillers. Contractor may contact Trane Lubbock (806)747-0266 for physical characteristics of the units. w Item 2: On the Drawings, Sheet M-14, under RTU-2 Detail, note that the enlarged curb detail is typical for all rooftop units, including 6" batt insulation under each unit. Item 3: On the Drawings, Sheet A-1, small detail drawings calling out openings to be blocked at location of removed HVAC units. This note applies to these two locations only. All other openings shall be blanked off as detailed on Sheet M-10. Item 4: On the Drawings, Sheet M-1, the heating water piping to the six fan coil units shall be modified under Bid Item #1. The Contractor under Seciton 15700 shall provide the controls for both heating and cooling under Bid Item �^ #1 as described in 15700, 3.10. Item 5: On Addendum #1, Item 7, Heating Coils at RTU-1 thru RTU- _ 8 shall also receive this type of FMD. Item 6: In the Specifications, page 15700-19, paragraph 3.20.B,3: Alternate 3-1, existing AHU-8 shall be included. Item 7: In the Specifications, page 15700-20, paragraph 3.20,D,1: Supply air temperature monitoring is not required on multi -zone air units, only single zone air units, specifically AHU-1, AHU-2, AHU-3, AHU-5, AHU-7, AHU-8, AHU-9, AHU-11, AHU-12, and RTU-7. End of Addenda .r CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS for r r- TITLE: HVAC RENOVATION - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT F.> ADDRESS: 6100 N. QUIRT AVENUE BID NUMBER: 10943 PROJECT NUMBER: 2153-552101-9569 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department r'► (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) .INDEX PAGE 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS..........................................................................................3 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................4 3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS.................................................................10 4. PAYMENT BOND..............................................................................................13 5. PERFORMANCE BOND..........................................................................................16 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE............................................................................ ...19 7. CONTRACT............................................................................ ................21 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.......................................................................23 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS...............................................................................41 10. SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................42 11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS........................................................................................43 12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE......................................................................................45 -2- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) NOTICE TO BIDDERS -3- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID # 10943 sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 29th day of November, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project• HVAC RENOVATION - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 13th day of December. 1990, at Municipal Bldg., Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed 425,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not � payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less _ than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. z There will be a pre -bid conference on 13th day of November, 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Lubbock International Airport Blue Room, 6100 N. Quirt Avenue. CITY Of LUBBOCK BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M. Purchasing Manager ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 10943 Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 29th day of November, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: 1' HVAC RENOVATION - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called.to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Stages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on 13th day of November, 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Lubbock International Airport Blue Room, 6100 N. Quirt Avenue. BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M. PURCHASING MANAGER (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) I" GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -4- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: Renovation of the H.V.A.C. system at LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT. The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS �^ All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen- eral Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 180 (ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub- mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple- tion of the project within the time specified. +- 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. -5- 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro- tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi- sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES AlC equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de- fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di- rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup- pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con- tractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi- als, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc- tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City re- serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma- terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. -6- 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES r It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc- tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fur- nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How- ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under- ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger sig- nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work .., as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re- placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barri- cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast- ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this r.. contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of ^� responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written -7- notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. ALL policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga- tion. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The. bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there- under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu- ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc- tion work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc- tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. -8- The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in- creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re- jected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL ^^ The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis- tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi- vidual, his name must be -signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign �-- proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name ~" (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol- Lowing: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. M All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to �-- Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. -9- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) No Text (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS HEATING AIR-CONDITIONING PLUMBING 44mdAo4tf Mec4aWiC-Cd ea., YAW- 710 EAST 40TH STREET PHONE 8061747.4217 FAX 8061763-4328 MAIL ADDRESS P.O. BOX 3430 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79452 010 PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE Lubbock International Airport DATE December 18, 1990 PROJECT NO.2153-552101-9569 Proposal of Armstrong Mechanical Co. , Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinofter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a HVAC RENOVATION ''Lubbock -International Airport having carefully. examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bi(kfers, notice to bidders and all other re- lated contract doc(nrents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surround- ing the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifica- tions and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be °''. a part, is as follows: � BASE BID ITEM 1: S�G�/y / i�I% � %?k%� �j 5/1'i✓D �%�K (S T �OUO.d 0 ) ALTERNATE NO.1: (ADD) 0��49,Q5 Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) BASE BID ITEM 2:d AKY� 111/1%� 021 6D6O. DO �—��L/'��A/� n/��!l��if%� (ice1 ) ALTERNATE NO. 1 fQC��7�/C a�/SA.-J S�i�/iN�� T��•d�is �5�i �o�.00 ) ..! (ADD / B11111M) jJvC�peJ, ALTERNATE N0.2:S/i�F��jff�e�1✓LD/lFl�/t/j/✓� (i D , DU (ADD) r.? ALTERNATE NO.3:41&�_5/� �/iOl/S/�i✓O �L 11L�/'�O �/y/� CS U J .00 ) (ADD) ��dE � 2 ALTERNATE N0.3 1:��_lf�ifi✓D 09!�. OD ) (ADD) Bidder hereby agrees to comrrx:nce the work on the above project on or before n date to be specified in n written "Notice to Proceed" of the owner pid to fully complete the project within ISO (ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated danrnges the Sun of $100.00 (One hundred dollars) for each License Nos. TACLA000335 & Plumbers M-732 consecutive calendar day in excess of the 0imu- set forth hereirnbove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general corxlitions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with in- struction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for O Dollars (S U ) or a Proposal Bond in the sun of S 9 _� Dollars (S_ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the urxiersigned fnils to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all con- tract documents mide available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Contractor BY: Woody Martin Vice President Armstrong Mechanical Co. (Seat,if'EZiddeh is a Corporation) ,r! ATTEST C� ! > , I Secretary .f � No Text (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) I The n FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND UFIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: Armstrong Mechanical Company, Inc. That we, - ---... -----•-------------------•-------------------------------- (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) ------------------------------- ---___--, as Principal, (hereinafter called the "Principal"), and ---- F dei ty._Ancl._Depos1t..Company................ of Baltimore, Maryland, a corporation duly organized (here insert the name of the Surety) under the laws of the State of Maryland, as Surety, (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto------------City-_of Lubbock -------- -----------------•---------------------------------------------•------------------- (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Owner) ' ..................................................................................................................as Obligee, (hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in the sum of ................ Five_.%..of__amount__.of___bid._attached___...__..._._.__._.___..____,_Dollars ($_5%--- of- bid ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be Made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for.................................................................................................. H. V. A. C. Renovation Lubbocl-. International Airport .............................................................. -..................................... ------------------------------.._......................_........_....._...----------.....---- Bid No. 10943, Lubbock, Texas NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter into such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then his obligation shall be null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this.............6th ...............day of ............ December..................... A.D. 19--4Q.._. Armstrong_Mechanical_ Cp,.� omanX_nc:.,(SEAL) l l Principal ........---•------------------------------------------ y Witness �t� .tip �� ---�.._.�`.......................... .............v...:. ............................ Title FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND (3 FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Surety .............................. B -C� ........................... (SEAL) Witness Cur is Coxon Title x C32S Tx) — Approved by The American Institute of Architects. A.I.A. DocumentA-3AFebruary 1970 Editions —,o s�. DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION In the event the Fidelity and Deposit Company or Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland is unable to fulfill its contractual obligation under this policy or contract or application or certificate or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or certificateholder is not protected by an insurance guaranty fund or other solvency protection arrangement. J3020(TX)-4M, 1-90 231439 C1 M Ri V V :� Q •N z .� iI O UP4 U"N q Q Q V 0 Q O ►� +-J 4 O a � x w_ w Oi 30 J IVH3S NO g •o The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND M MIN � c p FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PEIWT, JR. , Vice -President, and C. W. ROBBINS . Assistant Secretary, in pur of autho ' anted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth o Pte erse si o of and are hereby certified to be in S full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, c nda Curtis Coxon of Lubbock, Texas ......................... o the true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to , execute, nd deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds a derta ...EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Su rs an unity Guardi And the execution of such bonds or undertakings ' uance of presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, ey had be y executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their o in Balti e, d., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revok hat is on behalf of Curtis Coxon, dated, July 6, 1983. &antIN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents a Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEP tSOMPOF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 23rd _aY of January A.D. 1989 v ATTEST: QLTY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY F biA LAND By Assistant Secretary Vi a President FIDELITY AND D OSIT i PANY oil ` Assistant Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND ( SS: CITY OF BALTIMORE t By V ce-Presiden On this 23rd day of January , A.D. 19 89 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official SgaL&tjht City of Baltimore the da and year first above written. 0 "o'•ar •' o Public My commission expires__Jllj�L 1 _ 1290 CERTIFICATE I. the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice - Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board'of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. RESOLVED: "'That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have -hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this f. day of_ 4")c c, c� I , 19?v. 168-5047 Assistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section ?. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee. shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section ?. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." f -. PAYMENT BOND -13- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ., weFIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 s OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS ^• AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, 1959 BOND CHECK (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) LEST RATING LICENSED 1N TEXAS -- KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: DATE �R BY That ,........ Armstrong Mechanical Company,__Inc. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Lubbock,Texas--------------(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and ----------- Fidelity_ And Deposit__Company______________________ (Here insert the name of the Surety) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are -held and firmly bound unto ---------------------- Lubbock City of _ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- �—• (Here insert the name of the Obligee) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(hereinafter called the Obligee), Seven Hundred Eight Thousand Six Hundred and no/100 in the amount of - -------------------- -- --- ----- ----- - - ---- ------ ----- - --- - (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) Dollars for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the .................................... -1 Oth-----------------------day of --------- January----------------------------------------------------------- 19.g1 , —. to H. V. A. C. Renovation Lubbock International Airport which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this ' 14th day of. January ----•-----...---•---•--•-----._19.--.91-- --•--•----...--........; WITNESS: Armstrong Mechanical Company, Inc .(SEAL) .—---------•---------------------------------------------------•------------------•--------- ....... - - --- --- ---y l -----•--- (SEAL) (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) lam% C P ��p `� d •e 47 �- ATTES ---- (SEAL) ^ �''• (SEAL) l - ,� = -------------------------------------------------------•-- ri-nc p_ l...- �/ IF CORPORATION Princi al ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ® FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY ��' `�--uretyn ��.� :j ------•---- .------------•----B tis ../L'_. -�-`-, ---•------...•...---. SEAL f;urCoxon C6050b(TX)— DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION In the event the Insurer Is unable to fulfill Its contractual obligation under this policy or contract or application or certificate or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or certiflcateholder is not protected by an Insurance guaranty fund or other solvency protection arrangement. r� V00 V �d 'mod O ,, 0 PQ �O Q QU. w G p G 0 4' 4' 0 x "ZI � —4 —4 w w OIL 40 A IVHEg NO S '0H The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PE OT, JR. , Vice -President, and C . W. ROBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in purs of autho ° anted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth o everse si of and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, c to and;a-- Curtis Coxon of Lubbock, Texas...... ................... o the true an awful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to , execute, nd deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds a derta ...EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Su rs an unit Guardi A_nTtbe execution of such bonds or undertakings ' uance of presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, ey had be y executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their o in Balti e, d., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokW hat is on behalf of Curtis Coxon, dated, July 6, 1983. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents a tant Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEP SOMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 23rd ay of January A.D. 19 89 ATTEST: 19LITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY F MA LAND tS U,.�� By --L Assistant Secretary Vi a President Assistant Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND I SS CITY OF BALTIMORE ' FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT PANY By __ V ce-- es. en On this 23rd day of January , A.D. 19 89 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and with, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal jqt t City, of Baltimore the da and year first above written. 4'Ej ^OT�IIY �7 Ott, a o Public My commission expires__1ul,,4_ 1, 1940_ CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and ^" effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice - Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may he signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. RESOLVED: "'That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this day of is 19 y� . 168-5047 Assistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or anv Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds,' and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." L1419b(TX)—Ctf. PERFORMANCE BOND -16- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) P� FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS POND CHECK AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, 1959 (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) BEST RATING p KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: t.lCENSEDzI N TWS DATE BY Armstrong Mechanical Company, Inc. 'That,__ ------- --------------------------------------------------- -------------------------- ----------------------------- -- ---- (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) d Lubbock, Texas ------------- --- ______________________(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and------- Tidelity__ALi4__peppsit..Compqpy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Here insert the name of the Surety) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto---------------------- City of Lubbock ------------ - - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Here insert the name of the Obligee) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of.--__-__ Seven Hundred Eight Thousand Six Hundred and no/100 -- ------------------ I ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) ----- ----- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Dollars ($ ---a ��,ma:.Qa for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves; and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the - ------------------------------------------- 10 . t . h ---------------------------- day of ---------------- Jan . ua . ry ---------------------------------------------------- 19 .. 91... .... . .. ------ ---- ---- to H. V. A. C. Renovation Lubbock International Airport which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract docu- ments, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and seated this instrument this ........................... 1-4th _..._..day of ............J2PLI!a_u ................................ 19.... WITNESS: Armstrong Mechanical Company, In ....................................................�SEAL) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ......... ------ - - — ----- r------------------------(SEAL) (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) ATT3�ST: ................................................................................ (SEAL) — - ----------- ---- ---------- ...... Ir ---------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------- — --- (SEAL) (IF CORPO TION) Principal El FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND [3 FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY r�)relyl Surefy (SEAL) -------- - ---------------------- - - By- CW49a(TX)— Curtis Coxon DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION In the event the Insurer is unable to fulfill its contractual obligation under this policy or contract or application or certificate or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or certificateholder Is not protected by an Insurance guaranty fund or other solvency protection arrangement. :f Cd 0 Cd C)o z V V 4-,Q ." z 41H O a O V 00 w Z O O D, >1 4-)o, a Oi 30 3'IVHSa NO ON at • n � � • yl The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD.21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PE OT, JR. , Vice -President, and C. W. ROBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in puns of autho anted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth o everse si of and are hereby certified to be in '•` full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, c to and a Curtis Coxon of Lubbock, Texas .......................... o the true an awful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to , execute, nd deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds a derta ...EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Su rs an unity Guardi And the execution of such bonds or undertakings ' uance of presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, ey had be y executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their o in Bald e, d., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revok hat is on behalf of Curtis Coxon, dated, July 6, 1983. �O 0 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents tant Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DE P S OMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 23rd ay of January , A.D. 19 89 ATTEST: LITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY F MA LAND By Assistant Secretary Vi e-President Assistant Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND I SS: CITY OF BALTIMORE FIDELITY AND D OSIT PANY By --- - Preside. On this 23rd day of January , A.D. 19 89 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Se City of Baltimore the da and year first above written. „•or�sr es o Public My commission expires --- Jul. L_1 - 199n CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice - Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this /r day of — l ca 19y . J 168-5047 Assistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND . "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature Of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." ' EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of. the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." L1419M 1—Cd. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE -19- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) 0 CERTIFICATE OF I"'SURANCE i52E DATE 01-14-91 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------i PRODUCER 1 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGES 1 J.R. McEWIN i-------------- -- ----- , 11 7200 QUAKER AVE 1 COMPANY LETTER A SENTRY A MUTUAL CO. SUITE #15 1----------- , ,._ 1 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424 1 COMPANY LETTER B i --------------------------------------------------------------------' 1 INSURED 1 COMPANY LETTER C 1 1 ARMSTRONG MECHANICAL CO., INC. 1---------------------------------------------------------------i 1 COMPANY LETTER D 1 ^" P.O. BOX 3430 1---------------------------------------------------------------1 1 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79452 1 COMPANY LETTER E 1 1 COVERAGES i .., ; THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD 1 1 INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS 1 1 CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, 1 1 EXCLUSIONS, AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. 1 ---------------------------------------------------------- 1 iC0 i i 1 , POLICY 1 POLICY 1 LIABILITY LIMITS IN THOUSANDS (LTR! TYPE OF INSURANCE 1 POLICY NUMBER 1 EFFECTIVE 1 EXPIRATION1-------------------------------------------------- 1 1 i 1 DATE 1 DATE ( 1 EACH OCCURRENCE! AGGREGATE, (---+---------------------------- +-------------------+------------+------------+-------------------+----------------+-------------i .... ! i' GENERAL LIABILITY i i i i 1 1 BODILY INJURY is is 1 A 1[X] COMPREHENSIVE FORM i i i 1 1 1 1(X] PREMISES/OPERATIONS 1 i 1 1---------- -------- ---1 X UNDERGROUND EXPLOSION & 1 i i ! i ! ( " ( i COLLAPSE HAZARD 1 1 1 1 PROPERTY DAMAGE 1$ is ; 1 i[X] PRODUCTS/COMPLETED 1 88-94955-01 1 11-30-90 1 11-30-91 1 i i 1 1 OPERATIONS i i 1 i-------------------+----------------+-------------1 1 i[X] CONTRACTUAL ! i i i i i ...• i I] INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS 1 1 ; 1 BI & PD 1 1 1 1 1 X BROAD FORM PROPERTY i i i 1 COMBINED 1$ 500 is 1,000 i 1 1 DAMAGE i i 1 i i i i 1 ,, 1 i [X] PERSONAL INJURY , ,------------------------------------ , , +------------- 1 if ] i i i 1 PERSONAL INJURY is 500 ! _-1---+----------------------------+-------------------+------------+------------+------------------------------------+-------------i 1 1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 1 1 1 1 BODILY INJURY i ! 1 A ![ ] ANY AUTO ( i ( 1 (PER PERSON) is ! i 1 1[X) ALL OWNED AUTOS 1 88-94955-03 1 11-30-90 1 11-30-911-------------------+----------------+-------------1 ..,. i i (PRIV. PASS.) i i 1 1 BODILY INJURY 1 if ] ALL OWNED AUTOS 1 ! i 1 (PER ACCIDENT is , , , , , OTHER , '---------- '--------- ------ ---- � , +---------- +--------- , 1(Xj HIRED AUTOS 1 1 i 1 PROPERTY DAMAGE 1$ i i 1 X NON -OWNED AUTOS 1 1 i1-------------------+----------------+-------------i j GARAGE LIABILITY 1 1 i 1 BI & PD i i 1 i i 1 1 COMBINED 1$ 500 1 1---+----------------------------+-------------------+------------+------------+-------------------+----------------+-------------i ' '[[J EXCESS LIABILITY i i i i i i i .. A 1 88-94955-02 I1-30-90 1 11-30-9I ; 1tX OTHERLLA THANORM UMBRELLA 1 ( COMBINED 1$ 2,000 is 2,000 i i---+----------------------------+-------------------+------------+------------+------------------------------------!-------------i 1 1 WORKERS' COMPENSATION 1 i i 1 STATUTORY ' 1 A 1 AND 1 88-94955-08 1 11-30-90 1 11-30-91 1 $ 100 (EACH ACCIDENT) ^` 1 1 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY i i i 1 $ 500 (DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT) i i i i ! i $ 100 (DISEASE -EACH EMPLOYEE) i---+----------------------------+-------------------+------------+------------+-------------------------------------------------- i ' 1 OTHER i 1 i i i A 1------, 88-94955-06 1 i-------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-30-90 1 11-30-91 1 , 1 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS ; JOB DESCRIPTION: HVAC RENOVATION BID NUMBER: 10943 PROJECT NUMBER: 2153-552101-9569 CERTIFICATE HOLDER , CITY OF LUBBOCK L/I/A ATTN: GENE FADS, PURCHASING MGR. 1 1625 13TH STREET L/04 --1 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 , [ CANCELLATION ' SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR i TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER i NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL i IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, i ITS AGENCYS OR R PRESENTATIVES. i ----------- -------------------------------------------' AUTHORIZ -SE TATIJt 1 --------------------------_------=`-=`=_`"---------- _ 1 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY �^ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PE OT, JR. , Vice -President, and C. W. ROBBINS Assistant Secretary, in pars of autho anted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth o everse si o of and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, c e and a Curtis Coxon of Lubbock, Texas ............... ......... o t e true an awful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to , execute, nd deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds jaderta ...EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Su rs an unity Guardian And the execution of such bonds or undertakings ' uance of presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, ey had y executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their o in Balti e, d., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revok hat is on behalf of Curtis Coxon, dated, July 6, 1983. �� ill IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents aant Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEP S PANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 23rd ay of January A.D. 19-32 ATTEST: LITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY F MA LAND 0 (�_� T1 ke, Assistant Secretary Vi e-President FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT PANY By — Assistant .Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND I. SS: CITY OF BALTIMORE On this 23rd day of January , A.D. 19 89 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official S , City of Baltimore the da and year first above written. 0 .ter-sr'ta ` � o Public a My commission expires_JU1,y_l.._1999____ CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice - Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this -day of r c d -T 19 1. f _ l /flit 168-5047 Assistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." 1,1419b( I—Cd. CONTRACT -21- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 10th day of January, 1991, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and ARMSTRONG MECHANICAL CO., INC, of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON- TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as foL- lows: BID #10943-HVAC RENOVATION-LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IN THE AMOUNT OF $708,600.000. and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, —+ labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: ! .____..,._. CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER) e By: Secre ry 7Z. MAYOR AP VED AS TO CONTENT: APPROVED AS TO FORM: ARMSTRONG MECHANICAL CO.. INC. CONTRACTOR w Ae) 66- }�yyfi. G'rf�jff By:%% TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: ATTEST: C r P.O. Box 3430 -� Lubbock. TX 79452 Corporaee Secretary(,� r -22- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT ^ 1. OWNER r- Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con- tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, copartnership or corporation, to -wit: ARMSTRONG MECHANICAL CO., who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE r-" Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect construc- tions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na- ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR r.. The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no re- sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. f -24- T. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for wham it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu- ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract docu- ments has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu- ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu- ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. -25- ,- 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence- ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con- tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre- sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa- tive at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance With the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. it is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work,.therefore, written decisions or direc- tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there- from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela- tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION t^ It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con- tractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. -26- 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con- tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na- ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate- rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis- orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with- out the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu- tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall fur- nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation,. conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob- servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. -27- 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser- vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am- ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re- gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre- sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa- tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the P-. work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa- tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec- tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as un- '�" suitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re- build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur ,-, ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. if they in. - crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In -28- case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate- rial already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for,any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al- teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov- ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa- tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (8) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com- menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para- graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges .necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat- ters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin- ery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com- pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele- ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Repre- sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the owner's Representative in- sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi- tration -as herein below provided. -29- 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient suns in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re- quest.for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. ., If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci- fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state �— or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indem- nify and save harmless the owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits,'actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus- tained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon- tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro- gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump- tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. -30- 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, in- surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au- thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and S300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury $250/500,000 Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non - owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten- tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. -31- E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of ($1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen- sive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering.all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub- contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit. G. Proof of Coverage �— Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in- sured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con- tained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept- able. 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES A The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. ^- If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness -32- shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de- vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten- tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci- fied or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de- vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harm - Less from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an in- fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner ofsuch infringement. 31. 1LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and Local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in- sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutuaLLy agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con- sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold.permanentLy from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages -33- for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shalt be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the owner, that the time for the com- pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid- eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this Local-ity. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impractica- bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus- tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. ... 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con- tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev- eral parts. 35. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex- tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re- ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu- mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con- sideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in- cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge -34- shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of- fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be Liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor- mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis- tence or character of the work. 39. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative." 40. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de- fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the con- tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. -35- 41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica- tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par- tial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and �-. including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma- terials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole '^ work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per- centage due Contractor. 42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE r-� Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the -Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall in- spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac- cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 43. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be- fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of r this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con- tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor Piny provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi- tions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con- tractor shalt at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring atl work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the -36- date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de- fects with reasonable promptness. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar.to any claim by either party, except where noted other- wise in the contract documents. 48. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreemerlt shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se- lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall Lapse, and the de- cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei- ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar- biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. -37- The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sus- tained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar- biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ- ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or- ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, .� equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup- plies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said .Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- pleted by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- pleted by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspa- per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. -38- In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at -either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin- ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then.the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment,,and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo- rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Con- tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con- tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu- tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur- ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con- ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. -39- 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR .. Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au- thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob- serve Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and. ^� condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. r-• -40- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS -41- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r+. SPECIFICATIONS -42- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) I BID ITEM #1 Bid item #1 includes the addition of a new centrifugal chiller and associated pumps to the cooling plant, the structure for two new ceramic cooling towers with the working internals installed in only one, and the conversion of five existing air units, two built-up and three multi -zone, on the apron level from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. Two of the ,.. multi -zone air units will be converted to a Texas Multi -zone arrangement. The two built-up units along with a built-up unit which has already been converted to chilled water will require remedial work during this bid item. The remedial work will include the installation of new dampers and the installation of new heating water coils to change the configuration of the unit. This bid item also includes the. installation of a relief louver in one of the mechanical rooms. Finally, the entire control system for .� these units will be completely replaced to upgrade the existing system, which is mostly nonfunctional, to a completely operable system. Electrical work is required to connect the new chiller and cooling tower. This will involve redistribution from parts of the main switchboard to accommodate the new chiller and future chillers and equipment. Also required is a new fire alarm panel to serve the apron level air units which will be modified in this phase. The fire alarm panel will be provided to accommodate future service to other air units. P.- BID ITEM #2 Bid Item #2 includes the addition of a new chiller and associated pumps and the installation of the working internals to the second cooling tower structure erected in Bid Item #1. Also included in this bid item is a complete rework of the boiler room and the addition of a new boiler and heating water pumping system. This bid item also includes the replacement of eight roof mounted DX/gas air units with chilled water/heating water air units and the replacement of vertical self-contained air units on the apron level. This work will require the replacement of portions of the main heating water distribution loop and new pipe risers to the roof to serve the new air units. Also included is work at existing coils and unit heaters to modify the piping to these units to operate with the new distribution system. The existing controls are nonfunctional and will require complete replacement. Electrical work is required to redistribute power from the main switchboard to connect the new chiller and cooling tower and the new roof mounted air units. Also, an extension of the new fire alarm panel will be required to connect the new units. General constriction is required to replace ceilings and walls which will need to be removed during the construction and also to provide access to the mechanical chases. Some general construction will be required in the boiler room to accommodate the boiler room work. BID ITEM #1, ALTERNATE #1 (ALTERNATE #1-1) Alternate #1-1 is the substitution of a Direct Digital control/Building Management System (DDC/EMS) for the conventional pneumatic controls which are included in Bid Item #1. BID ITEM #2, ALTERNATE #1 (ALTERNATE #2-1) P., Alternate #2-1 is the substitution of a Direct Digital Control/Building Management System (DDC/BMS) for the conventional pneumatic controls which are included in Bid Item #2. BID ITEM #2, ALTERNATE #2 (ALTERNATE #2-2) '- Alternate #2-2 is the work required to tear off and replace the roof in the lower roof mechanical areas (approximately 9820 sq. ft.) with a modified bitumen roof. BID ITEM! #2, ALTERNATE #3 (ALTERNATE #2-3) Alternate 42-3 is the work required to replace the conduit and wiring to lights and speakers which has deteriorated in the deck of the lower roof mechanical areas. This alternate will only be taken if Alternate #2-2 is taken. BID ITEM #2, ALTERNATE 3-1 This alternate is the modification of the six existing chilled water/heating water air units, which were installed in 1984, to DDC/ES. LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE NOS. 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1-3 01:600 Materials 1-3 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02200 Excavating, Filling and Grading 1-9 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Concrete Work 1-8 03450 Precast Concrete Facing Panels 1-5. 03510 Poured Gypsum Roof Deck 1-2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04100 Mortar 1-2 04200 Unit Masonry 1-3 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 Miscellaneous Metals 1-3 DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION 07514 Roofing and Sheet Metal 1-5 07536 Modified Bitumen Roofing System 1-5 07606 Sheet Metal Flashings 1-3 07900 Caulking and Sealants 1-3 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Hollow.Metal Doors and Frames 1-3 08330 Rolling Service Door 1-2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09200 Lath and Plaster (stucco) 1-4 09230 Marblecrete 1-4 09250 Gypsinn Drywall Construction 1-3 09500 Acoustical Ceiling Systems 1-3 09900 Painting and Finishing 1-5 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Provision for Mechanical and Electrical 1-12 15200 Piping and Accessories 1-9 15210 Plumbing System 1-2 15230 Chilled Water System 1-2 15235 Heating Water System 1-2 15250 Condensing Water Sytem 1-2 15290 Marking and Identification 1-3 15320 Air Distribution 1-5 15330 Hangers and Supports 1-4 15335 Vibration Isolation 1-2 15400 Insulation 1-3 15500 Equipment 1-29 15600 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 1-9 15700 Temperature Regulation 1-21. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16110 Raceways and Fittings 1-5 16120 Conductors 1-4 16140 Wiring Devices 1-2 16150 Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring 1-2 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 1-1 16195 Electrical Identification 1-1 16450 Grounding 1-1 16470 Panelboa ds 1-3 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 1-2 16500 Lighting 1-2 16723 Fire Alarm and Detection System 1-12 16920 Motor Control Centers 1-2 P-- SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.01 GENERAL: A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings, product data and �-. samples required by speficiation sections. C. Prepare and submit a list of required submittals of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. List submittal items in numerical order of specification section numbers. Identify each submittal in list with an item number, specification section number, name of product and type of submittal (Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples). Include dates for submission and need dates for each item. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor,supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproductible transparency with one opaque print. r-, 1.03 PRODUCT DATA: A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: ® 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to Project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to Project. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 1.04 SAMPLES: A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment and workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work is judged. B. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Erect at Project site at location acceptable to Architect. 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete including work of all trades required in finished work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission to Engineer. Initial, sign, or stamp, certifying to review of submittal. B. Verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 01340- 1 C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents. D. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Engineer's review of submittals. E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Engineer gives written acceptance of specific deviations. F. Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. G. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Engineer's stamp and initials or signature indicating review. H. After Engineer's review, distribute copies. 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Schedule submissions at least 30 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed, in accordance with approved submittal schedule. B. Submit l reproducible transparency and one opaque print of shop drawings for structural steel and preengineered metal building. C. Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires for distribution, plus 3 copies which will be retained by Engineer. D. Submit number of samples specified in each of/specification sections. E. Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and Sample submitted. 5. Notification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Other pertinent data. F. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title. 3. Names of Engineer, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards. 8. Other pertinent data required by Specifications. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract documents. 11.Space large enough to accept Engineer's approval stamp (3"x 1-1/2"). 01340- 2 1.07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for.initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Engineer. B. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required for initial submittal. 1.08 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW: A. Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Engineer's stamp as required for construction, including Contractor's file, job site file, record documents file, other prime contractors, subcontractors, supplier and fabricator. End of Section. 01340- 3 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS 1.01 UNAVAILABILITY OR LATE DELIVERIES: Contractor shall order and schedule delivery of materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item is found to be unavailable, Contractor shall notify Architect/ Engineer immediately to permit mutual selection of suitable substitute. If. Contractor fails to order materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction, an approved material shall be substituted at no extra cost to the Owner. Or, at the Architect/Engineer's discretion, approval of a substitute will be given only upon agreement by the Contractor to remove substituted material at a later date agreeable to Owner, and replace it at Contractor's expense with material originally specified. Such approval shall be subject to the same terms as for "Substitutions". 1.02 MATERIAL TESTING: A. Laboratory tests and inspections specified or required of material and finish articles incorporated in the work shall be made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the Architect/Engineer. Reports will be submitted to the Architect/Engineer or distributed as established at the preconstruction conference. Cost of testing and inspections will be paid for by the Contractor. B. Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary for safe and convenient inspection and tests required by the Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be performed in manner not to delay work unnecessarily. Contractor will be charged with cost of extra inspection when material or work is not ready at time inspection is required. C. Test samples as Architect/Engineer may deem necessary shall be procured from material or equipment delivered for use in the work. If any test sample fails to meet specification requirements: 1. Previous approval may be withdrawn and such material or equipment may be subject to removal and replacement by Contractor at his expense with material or equipment meeting specification requirements. 2. Architect/Engineer may refuse consideration of further samples of same brand or make for testing. Contractor shall bear cost of all further testing until Architect/Engineer's approval is granted. 3. At Owner's discretion, defective material and equipment may be permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of Contract price. 1.03 MATCHING MATERIALS: Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Owner shall be the sole authority in the determination of an acceptable match. 01600-1 1.04 SPECIFIED ITEMS - SUBSTITUTIONS: _. In addition to the requirements of General Conditions Article V, 5.13 the following applies: A. Whenever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names, followed by the designation "or equal" are used in conjunction with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned in these specifications, they are used to establish the standards of quality and utility required. Substitutions which are equal in quality and utility to those specified will be approved, subject to the following provisions: All substitutions must be approved by the Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing. For this purpose the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer within 35 calendar days after recording of.the Contract, a typewritten list containing a description of each proposed substitute item or material. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, literature or other detailed information as will demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer that the proposed substitute is equal in quality and utility to the material specified shall be appended to this list. The Architect/Engineer will approve after receiving written concurrence from the Owner, in writing, such proposed substitutions as are, in his opinion, equal in quality and utility to the times or materials specified. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and the Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for any changes resulting from his proposed substitutions which affect other parts of the work. B. Failure of the Contractor to submit proposed substitutions for approval in the manner described and within the time prescribed shall be sufficient cause for disapproval by the Architect/Engineer, or any substitutions otherwise proposed. C. Whenever catalog numbers and specific brands -or trade names are not followed by the designation "or equal" or used in conjunction with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned in these specifications, no substitutions will be approved. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitutions of any materials other than those specifically called for shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. 1.06 ITEMS SPECIFIED BY TRADE NAME: Reference to items by specific trade name is made as a basis of quality and function. Equivalent items may be used in their stead; however, the right of determining such quality shall remain with the Owner's Representative. The terms "similar to", "approved", or or equal" or similar phrases shall be interpreted similarly. 1.07 LABELS: Manufacturer's or trade names together with model or serial designations, grade markings, fire ratings, etc. will be permitted and are required on certain components of the work. These items shall be placed in concealed, but accessible locations, and absolutely no labels advertising any manufacturer or trade name will be permitted on exposed portions of components without written authorization from Architect/Engineer. 01600-2 1.08 MATERIALS STORAGE: A. The Contractor will be allowed space on the grounds for the storage of his materials, but he shall provide all necessary enclosures, doors, and locks, and he shall be solely responsible for the safekeeping of all materials, tools, etc., stored therein. B. Such storage facilities shall be moved when so directed by the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. After completion of the work, they shall be completely removed and all materials taken from the premises. 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, secured, used, cleaned and put in operation as recommended, directed or specified by the manufacturer,for the type of installation called for. B. Where work is specified to be in accordance with product manufacturer's directions, Contractor shall procure such information in sufficient quantities to supply interested parties. End of Section. 01600- 3 SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATING FILLING AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL -- 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This Section includes all clearing, excavating, filling, grading, and related items necessary to complete work shown on drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements p-. apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete Work - Section 03300 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Provide and place any additional material required to bring existing grades to new sub -grade indicated or specified. B. Utility lines encountered during excavation shall be brought to the Engineer's attention immediately. Active utilities passing under the building area will be relocated by the various Contractors concerned,' unless otherwise noted or shown. 1.05 SAFETY CODES AND STANDARDS: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of -governing authorities having jurisdiction. All excavations shall be performed in accordance with the standards set forth in "Occupational Safety Standards for Excavation Work and Shoring." 1.06 TESTING: Cost'of laboratory test shall be paid by the Contractor as specified in Section 01600. 1.07 USE OF EXPLOSIVES: Do not bring explosives onto the site or use in work. 1.08 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: A. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights for safety of persons. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day. B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations, from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards. C. Take precautions and provide necessary bracing and shoring to guard against movement or settlement of existing improvements or new construction. Contractor is entirely responsible for strength and adequacy of bracing and shoring, and for safety and support of construction from damage.or injury caused by lack thereof or by movement or settlement. 02200 - 1 1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES: The drawings indicate the ,extent of site clearing required by the Contract. No trees outside of the improved area shall be damaged or removed without written approval of the Engineer. Trees to remain within the improved area are indicated on the drawings and shall be protected as herein specified. 1.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: A. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. B. Restore any improvements damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to the Owners or other parties or authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING: A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that interfere with installation of new construction. Also, remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes new and old stumps of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct new construction. B. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 411. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. C. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, and in such manner as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. D. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage'to the main root system. E. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING: A. Clear the improved area site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. B. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through the ground surface. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside the drip line of trees indicated to be left standing. C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. D. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 02200 - 2 3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE.MATERIAL::' A. Burning of combustible material shall not be permitted. B. Waste Material: Transport waste materials from the Owner's property and legally dispose of it. -- C. Excavated Materials Under Building: Material indicated to be removed from under the building may be redeposited in fill areas outside the building area where grading will permit. This material shall not be used under walks, roads, or other paved areas, unless it meets applicable specifications for fill material as herein specified. 3.04 EXCAVATION: A. Preparation: - 1. Site shall be cleared of structures, foundations, pavements, utility lines, debris, fences and other obstructions within the contract limits. 2. Debris and obstructions outside building lines shall "^ be removed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below finish grade. Existing basement walls, floors, cisterns, underground tanks and similar structures shall be removed in entirety wherever located on the site. B. General Requirements: 1. Footings may be excavated to dimensions of the concrete work and poured without forms if the nature of the soil will permit. All exposed to view concrete surfaces will be formed as specified in Section 03300. 2. Concrete walls and piers other than beams specified -" above will be formed each side. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the plans plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms required, and permit inspection of forms. 3. Protect all excavations from frost. Concrete will not be placed on frozen ground. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations of dimensions without specified direction of Engineer. D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation . bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean .- concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, only when acceptable to Engineer. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. F. Spot Footings: 1. Spot footing excavations shall be made only after accurately sized templates are properly positioned and checked by the Engineer.. 2. Sides of footings excavations shall be true, parallel. to the building lines, and neatly trimmed. - 02200 - 3 G. IIM J. K. 3. Bottoms of excavations for footings shall be at the proper elevation, flat, and free of all loose dirt and debris. Should suitable bearing not be found at the contract elevation, the Engineer shall have the privilege of revising the elevation to a greater depth. In this event, adjustments in the contract price will be made using the unit prices submitted in the proposal. Stability of Sides: Slope sides of excavations over 5' deep to angle of repose of material excavated; otherwise, shore, and brace where sloping.is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling, by scaling, benching shelving, or bracing. Take precautions to prevent slides or cave-ins when excavations are made in locations adjacent to backfilled excavations, and when sides of excavations are subjected to vibrations from vehicular traffic or the operation of machinery, or any other source. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring.and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Provide minimum.requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with ANSI A10.1 "Safety Code for Building Construction", and with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Dewatering: Perform earthwork in a manner to prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations, and to prevent water from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water using dewatering methods which will prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain materials away from edge of excavations, even though such excavations may be sheeted and braced,.to prevent such material falling or sliding 02200 - 4 into the excavations to prevent cave-ins. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials, such as unsatisfactory excavated soil material, trash and debris, as specified hereinafter. -^ L. Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.171, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and for other construction required, and for inspection. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete is place. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to -. receive concrete. M. All work in connection with excavation shall be performed in accordance with the standards set forth in "Occupational Safety Standard for Excavation Work and Shoring." 3.05 SELECTION AND PLACEMENT OF FILL: �- A. Selection and Placement of Fill Beneath Soil Supported Monolithic Slabs: 1. Selection: Select fill shall meet the following requirements: Maximum Plasticity Index: 12 Minimum Plasticity Index: 3 No stones larger than 1-1/2" 2. Compaction: Select fill shall be compacted in the field is not to exceed 6" lifts to a minimum of 95% of -- ASTM D698. Laboratory moisture -density curve or curves as required,. and results of at least 4 field density checks per lift are to be submitted to the Engineer or Engineer. Compaction procedures are to be approved by the Engineer or designated soil engineer. Samples of proposed select fill shall be furnished to the testing laboratory 7 days prior to installation to permit time for specification compliance inspection and approval. 3. Top six inches (611) immediately below the slab within the building shall be sand as approved by the Engineer. Sand shall be free of all foreign matter and shall be compacted to 95% maximum density. B. Compaction: 1. General: Perform compaction of soil materials for backfills and fills using suitable soil compaction equipment for materials to be compacted and work area locations. Control soil compaction during construction for compliance with percentage of maximum density specified for each area classification. 02200 - 5 2. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Provide not less than the following percentages of maximum density of the same soil material compacted at optimum moisture content, for the actual density of each layer of soil material -in -place. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% of ASTM D698 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95% of ASTM D698 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% of ASTM D698 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 85% maximum density for cohesive soil material. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% of ASTM D698 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. 3. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface or subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permitcompactionor specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread where directed by Engineer and.permitted to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory. value, as determined by moisture -density relation tests. When accepted by Engineer, soil material may used by compacted backfill or fill. C. Backfill and Fill: 1. General a. Backfill consists of placement of acceptable soil material in layers, in excavations to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. b. Fill consists of placement of acceptable soil materials, in layers, over ground surface to required elevations, for each area classification listed below. c. Backfill and Fill Materials: Selection: Select fill shall meet the following requirements: Maximum Plasticity Index: 12 Minimum Plasticity Index:. '3 No stones larger than 1-1/2" 02200 - 6 Provide acceptablesoil materials for backfill and fill, free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable matter, and other deleterious matter. In excavations, use excavated or borrow material that has been tested and approved. Under grassed areas, use excavated or borrow. material that has been tested and approved. Under walks and pavements, use subbase material, or excavated or borrow material, or combination of both, that has been tested and approved. Under steps, use subbase material. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material. d. Prior to Backfill Placement: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: Acceptance by Engineer of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Inspect, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities. Removal of concrete formwork. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. Removal of trash and debris. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. e. Preparation of Ground Surface to Receive Fill: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will -bond with existing surface. ^^ When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. f. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 02200 - 7 Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3.06 GRADING: A General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading .under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact and with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structure and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.101'above or below the required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below the required subgrade elevation. Finish grade shall be 2" below finish walks, curbs and other paved or concrete construction. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement.to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below the required subgrade elevation. 4. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/4" when tested with a 10' straightedge. 5. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. C. Maintenance: 1. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. 2. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations, or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 02200 - 8 3.07 TOP SOIL: After all grading, fill operations have been completed, top soil shall be redeposited over area designated on the drawings. All debris and stones of 1/2" or more in diameter.shall be removed by harrowing and hand raking to obtain a fine finished seed bed. Top soil shall be redeposited to a compacted depth of four (4) inches. c This Section prepared by Joseph R. Rapier, P.E. End of Section 02200 - 9 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL• 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This section includes all materials, placing and finishing of all plain and reinforced concrete as indicated on the drawings. Form work, reinforcing, curing and related items are a part of this section. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary IConditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Excavating, Filling and Grading - Section 02200 Precast Concrete Facing Panels - Section 03450 Gypsum Roof Deck - Section 03510 Caulking and Sealants - Section 07900 Marblecrete - Section 09230 1.04 CONCRETE TESTS: A. Make test cylinders from concrete as mixed, and at the direction of the Engineer. A minimum of three (3) test cylinders shall be made for each major pour. B. Test specimen shall be taken by the Contractor and tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM C-31 for "Compression Tests of Concrete". Results of tests shall immediately be submitted to the Engineer. Cost of tests will be paid by the Contractor as specified in Section 01600. C. Where the ultimate 28 day compressive strength of concrete in any test cylinder falls below the strength specified for the class of concrete tested or below proportional minimum 7-day strengths, the proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to secure the required strength. If directed by the Engineer, all concrete whose test specimen falls below the required compressive strength shall be removed from the structure. D. Substitution of materials shall not be made without additional tests for quality. All tests shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 REFERENCE: The current issue of ACI-3011 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" is a part of this specification and applicable to this project. Where any part of ACI-301 specification is modified or voided by this specification, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: Store cement on platforms off ground; protect stored cement against the elements. Handle and store aggregate separately in manner to prevent intrusion of foreign material. Protect all reinforcement until used. Use no frozen material or any hardened cement. 03300 - 1 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Drawings shall show bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing, and laps or rods, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. Shop drawings must be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM Spec. C-150 or Air -Entraining Portland Cement C-175, use Type III -A where high early strength concrete might be required, and Type I or I -A for all other concrete work. -- 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATE: Hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone or gravel conforming to ASTM Spec. C-33. Maximum size aggregate allowed is 1/5 of narrowest dimension between forms of the concrete member or 3/4 of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. For concrete having an exterior surface exposed, 95 to 100% shall pass a 1-1/2" sieve, 35 to 70% shall pass a 3/4" sieve, 10 to 30% shall be a 3/8" sieve, and not more than 5% shall pass a No. 4 sieve. Soundness of coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-88. All coarse aggregate when tested shall not have a loss greater than 15% when tested with magnesium sulfate solution, nor more than 10% when tested with sodium sulfate solution. 2.03 SAND: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains free from silt, loam, and clay. Grade in size from fine to coarse with 95 to 100% by weight passing No. 4 sieve; 45 to 70% passing No. �- 16 sieve; 15 to 30% passing No. 50 sieve, and 3 to 8% passing No. 100 sieve. 2.04 MIXING WATER: Clean and free from oil, acid, and injurious amounts of vegetable matter, alkalis, and other salts. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be domestic and shall conform to ASTM A615 Grade 60, and shall have 60,000 lbs. per square inch minimum yield point, except that #3 bars, ties and stirrups may be Grade 40 with 40,000 lbs. per ... square inch minimum yield point. Deformation of deformed bars shall conform to Specification for "Deformation of Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A615. If required, furnish certified mill test reports with each delivery, attesting that reinforceme.nt.meets specification requirements. 2.06 STEEL FABRIC REINFORCING: Steel wire spot-welded at intersections and of size indicated. Where size is not noted, it shall be 6 x 6 W1.4 x W1.4. Use steel fabric reinforcing in all sidewalks except as otherwise indicated. Lap all edges 6" and tie with wire at 4'-0" o.c. Steel fabric reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A-185. 03300 - 2 2.07 NON -SHRINK GROUT: Equal to master Builders Embeco Grout (pre -mixed). 2.08 METAL ACCESSORIES: Include all spacers, chairs, ties and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. All metal. accessories shall be zinc coated; for exposed work, support ends shall be turned upward. Material and work shall be in accordance with CRSI-72, except as modified by this specification or the drawings. 2.09 EXPANSION JOINT.FILLER: Expansion joint filler shall be preformed saturated fiber filler, Celotex Flexcell, or approved equal. Joint material shall be full thickness of slab or joint, and unless otherwise indicated, 1/2" thick. 2.10 ADMIXTURE: Chemical Admixtures, Pozzolanic Admixtures, ASTM C-494-71 or C-618-73, modified for loss of ignition not exceeding 6%. Admixture shall be used subject to certification based on tests and data. Submit certificates with related laboratory test reports attesting that admixture meets specified requirements and that admixture to be used for work under the contract is identical in composition and concentration with type used in test for acceptance. 2.11 SEALING AND CURING FRESH CONCRETE: Clear bond treatment as manufactured by The Guardian Chemical Co. or an approved equal. Sealer shall conform to ASTM C-309, Type I Clear. 2.12 EPDXY COATING: Two-part, ambient temperature curing epoxy system for coating wet or dry surfaces. The coating shall be AQUATA PDXY Paint as supplied by American Chemical Corporation, 1115-Hamilton Court, Melno Park, CA 94025; Tel: 415/327-5210, or approved equal. 2.13 FORMS: A. Smooth Finish: Use new 9/16" thick moisture -resistant plywood or line forms with 1/4" thick plywood. B. Rough Finish: .Use clean straight surfaced lumber. 2.14 WATER STOPS: Extruded rubber, rubber compound or poly- vinylchloride. Cross section shall be dumbbell (bulbed), ribbed, or otherwise deformed to prevent movement and shall have an expandable center section. Materials shall be resistant to acid, alkali solution, and deterioration. Thickness not less than 1/811, or 1/8" tapering to 1/16" at outer edges for widths up to and including 511; 3/1611, or 3/1611 tapering to 1/3" at outer edges for widths over 511. Joints shall be sealed. Submit descriptive literature and samples for approval. 2.15 AIR -ENTRAINING AGENT: Neutralized Vinsol Resin, or an approved substitute, conforming to ASTM C-260 03300 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION• 3.01 3000 PSI CONCRETE: All concrete designated 3000 psi shall have.a compressive strength of 2400 psi in 7 days, and 3000 �- psi in 28 days. Use this mix for all concrete work required on this project, except for composite design floor slabs. 3.02 3000 PSI AIR ENTRAINED CONCRETE: All concrete shall have a compressive strength of 2400 psi in 7 days, and 3000 psi in 28 days. Use this mix for sidewalks, curbs and all other concrete slabs exposed to weather. Total air content required shall be 6%. 3.03 PROPORTIONS: �. A. Proportion mixed by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be.employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. B. Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Engineer. C. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C-192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C-39, specified in ACI-301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (.or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Engineer, to establish each point on the curve. D. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI-301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility ^� has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. Standard Deviation: If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete After sufficient experience and test data become - available from the job, using ACI-214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. 03300 - 4 E. The proportions and mixes of aggregate to cement paste shall be designed by a recognized commercial laboratory from a representative sample of aggregate stockpiled at the site if job mixed; if ready -mixed, shall be from a representative sample of aggregates stockpiled at the plant. If additional material is brought on the site for concrete work, a new design shall be made. The Contractor shall obtain a written approval from the Engineer of the particular laboratory which he proposes to use. Cost -of each design mix for each strength will be paid for by the Contractor as specified in Section 01600. If additional material is brought to the stockpile, additional tests will be paid for by.the Contractor. F. Workability of concrete shall be such that concrete can be handled, placed and worked into angles and corners of forms, around reinforcing steel and inserts without segregation, without water and fine material rising to the surface. G. Slumps: Slumps shall fall within the following limits: Footings Max. 3 --- Min. 1 Grade Beams, Walls Max. 5 --- Min. 2 Structural Slabs and Beams Max. 4 --- Min. 2 Columns Max. 4 --- Min. 2 3.04 MEASURING: The method of measuring water and aggregates shall be such as to secure specified proportion in each batch and in manner that proportion of water to cement can be closely controlled and easily checked at any time. 3.05 MIXING CONCRETE: All concrete throughout shall be either job or plant mixed in an approved type of power operated mixer that will insure a uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. Contractors shall see that sufficient number of mixers are provided to rapidly carry on the work. Mixing shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code. Mix each batch a minimum of one (1) minute before discharging. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE: A. Place no concrete until foundations, forms, reinforcing steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves, hanger, anchors, inserts, waterproofing, dampproofing, and/or other work required to be built into concrete has been installed, inspected, and approved by the Engineer. Before pouring footings, see that bottoms of excavations are undisturbed earth with no loose earth under bearing surface. B. Place no concrete until earth 'surface to come in direct contact with the concrete has been sprinkled thoroughly with water. C. The placing or depositing of all concrete shall be done in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code. 03300 - 5 ^ 3.07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: The.rate and method of placing concrete and arrangement of construction joints shall be such that concrete may be placed in one (1) continuous operation. Location of construction joints shall be as -- shown on drawings or as approved by the Engineer. 3.08 REMOVAL OF FORMS: Forms shall be removed in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code, without damage to concrete and in a`manner to insure complete safety pf the structure. Leave shoring in place until concrete member may safely support its weight and loads upon it. Generally, the following procedure will be required: 1. Wall forms may be removed after 72 hours. 2. Grade beam forms may be removed after 24 hours. 3. Structural slab and beam forms may be removed after concrete has obtained 75% of designed strength. �. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS: Construct forms to slopes, lines, and dimensions shown, plumb and straight and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage; securely brace and shore forms to •- prevent displacement and to safely support construction loads. Provide access openings to clean and inspect forms and reinforcing prior to depositing concrete. Do not coat forms with materials that will stain or cause injury to exposed concrete surfaces. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage. Forms for exposed concrete beams, girders, columns and pilasters shall provide for a one inch (111) chamfer on external corners. Construct forms for beams, girders and lintels so that sides may be removed without disturbing bottom of form or its support. See .-. drawings for special architectural effects. '3.10 PLACING REINFORCEMENT: Place reinforcement accurately in position shown; securely fasten and support to prevent displacement before or during pouring. Cleaning, bending and placing of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute p~ Building Code. 3.11 INSERTS AND FASTENING DEVICES FOR OTHER WORK: Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchor bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, ground and other fastening devices required for attachment of other work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades, and secure in position before concrete is poured. Install sleeves for all piping passing through grade beams. Sleeve locations shall be approved by the �-- Engineer. 03300 - 6 3.12 CURING OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE: A. Curing of floor slabs is specified separately. B. After concrete structural members have taken the initial set (approximately 1 to 3 hours after placement), exposed surfaces shall be flooded with water or kept moist by sprinkling for a period of not less than 72 hours. No curing compound shall be used on surfaces where finish requiring bonding is specified. 3.13 PATCHING: Directly after forms have been removed, all exposed tie wires and stapled ends shall be removed from concrete surface to be exposed; cut ties flush with finished surfaces of all other concrete. Rub smooth or cut off fins and rough places; remove all loose concrete and fill honeycombing surfaces, stone pockets, and other irregularities with cement mortar. Do not patch any surface until examination has been made by the Engineer and permission given. 3.14 PROTECTION AND CURING: Protect concrete against frost and rapid drying, and keep moist for at least six (6) days after placing. Concrete from which forms are removed within six (6) days after pouring, and cement finishes shall be sprayed during the curing period as.frequently as drying conditions may require, and if necessary, be protected by suitable temporary coverings. Cover cement finishes with waterproof paper as specified under Paragraph entitled "Cement Floor Finishes". 3.15 FLOOR SLABS: A. Concrete floor slabs on earth shall be placed over a well -tamped subgrade. Tamp and roll fill until thoroughly compacted. Immediately place concrete.of required thickness, and strike off at proper levels to receive finishes specified. B. Set continuous expansion joint strips where edge of slab abuts a vertical surface and elsewhere as shown; seal joint tightly around strips and spaces around pipes penetrating floors. Use coal -tar pitch or asphalt mastic for sealing joints. . 3.16 CEMENT FLOOR FINISHES: A. Troweled Surfaces: This specification if for exposed slabs with or without integral coloring, sidewalks, and slabs to receive floor covering. 1. Slabs to receive floor coverings shall be screeded a maximum of 8'-0" o.c., or as directed by the Engineer. After placing, the concrete shall be rodded and screeded to the proper elevations, then darbied or floated., As screeds are removed, the voids shall be filled and leveled; "Jitterbugs" or similar devices . for bringing fines to the surface may be used prior to darby or float work if used in a manner approved by the Engineer. 03300 - 7 2. As soon as possible the slabs shall be "laid down" by hand troweling the surface once over completely. At this time the surface shall be checked with a 10'-0" straight edge, and high or low spots shall be brought to a common level at the elevation shown. . 3. As soon as the surface is capable of supporting_a troweling machine, the slab shall be troweled again. Hand troweling will be approved for the second troweling. 4. As soon as the surface will "ring" under a steel trowel, a final hand troweling will be required. All machine marks must be removed, and the surface must be left smooth, level, and true. Irregularity in the surface grade exceeding 1/8" in 10' will not be accepted. 5. When the surface can be walked upon without damage, cover all slabs with waterproof paper conforming to Fed. Spec. UU-B-790, or ASTM C-17111 lapping the edges sufficiently to seal out the air and secure in place by spreading sand over the paper. This covering shall remain in place a minimum of fourteen (14) days. Chemical curing compound may be used if type is compatible with finish flooring and approved by the Engineer. 3.19 EPDXY COATING: A. Where scheduled on the Drawings, apply chemical -hardener finish to concrete and metal surfaces B. Apply proprietary epoxy coating, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. The epoxy coating shall be applied no earlier than 28 days after concrete has been placed. 3.20 COLD WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Place no concrete whenever it is anticipated that air temperature at the point of placement is likely to fall below 40 deg. F. B. Concrete may be placed when air temperature is 40 deg. F. and rising. C. Use of accelerators and anti -freeze compounds will not be approved. 3.21 RUBBED FINISH: Where indicated, rubbed finish shall consist of smooth finish, as specified, wetted thoroughly and rubbed with carborundum stones.to a finish uniform in color and texture. Mortar or grout shall not be employed during rubbing, and mortar worked up during rubbing shall be removed. Upon completion of rubbing, the surfaces shall be washed thoroughly with clean water. This Section Prepared by Joseph R. Rapier, P.E. End of Section 03300 - 8 SECTION 03450 - PRECAST CONCRETE FACING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide precast facing panels where shown on the Drawings. Include all materials, samples,.testing and erection of precast concrete panels, all anchors, inserts and other hardware embedded in precast concrete panels along with loose angles, bolts and shims essential to installation of the precast concrete elements. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete Work -.Section 03300 Caulking and Sealants - Section-07900 1.04 SUBMITTAL: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. A. Shop Drawings 1. Show complete information for the fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. Indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. 2. Show layout, dimensions, and identification of each precast unit corresponding to the sequence and procedure of installation. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories and construction at openings in precast units. 3. Show location and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other construction. 4. No work shall proceed until shop drawings and full size mock-up have been approved by the Engineer. B. Submit concrete control, test results for review by the Engineer. C. Mock -Up Panel: 1. Submit one half-size mock-up panel of required precast concrete facing panel to the project site prior to fabrication of work. Acceptable full-size mock-up may be incorporated in the construction. 2. The finishes of the mock-up shall have uniform appearance and shall match color, texture in all respects to the precast concrete facing sample in the Engineer's office on the existing adjacent building. 3. If this mock-up is not satisfactory, additional mock- ups shall be constructed until approved by the Engineer. All mock-ups disapproved shall be removed from the site. 03450 - 1 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver precast concrete units to the project site in such quantities and at such times as will assure the continuity of the installation. Store units at the site to ensure against cracking, distortion staining, or other physical damage and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units at the same points where they will be supported in the finished structure. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Erector must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the precast concrete work is to be erected. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. B. Verify dimensions of supporting structures at the project site and adjust final shop drawings to reflect actual field dimensions. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Reference Standards: 1. The current issue of the Prestressed Concrete Institute "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products", MNL-117, is a part of this specification and applicable to -this project. Where any part of MNL-117 is modified or voided by this specification the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. B. Concrete Control Tests: 1. Test 2 specimen cylinders at 7 days and one specimen cylinder at 28 days. Test will not be paid by the Owner. Test will be performed by the precast panel fabricator and all cost will be included in his price. C. Fabrication Qualifications: Produce precast units at a fabrication plant engaged primarily in the manufacturing of similar units. D. Design Criteria: The design of units are for in -place service dead and live loads only. Reinforcement for handling, lifting, stripping and erection conditions, including inserts, shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer. E. Performance Requirements: 1. Evaluate quality of concrete work for precast concrete. units as specified in Section 03300, "Concrete". Conduct inspections, perform testing, and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory precast units as required. 2. In addition to above, in -place precast units may be rejected for any one of the following: a. Exceeding the specified installation tolerances. b. Damaged during construction operations. c. Exposed -to -view surfaces which develop surface finish deficiencies. 03450 - 2 d. Other defects as listed in PCI MNL-116. PART 2 - PRODUCTS• 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I, Cement as manufactured by Texas Industries, Inc. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, size, shape and color to match sample in Engineer's office/precast concrete facing on existing adjacent building. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, requirements for fine aggregate, manufactured to match sample in Engineer's office/precast concrete facing on existing adjacent building. D. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, organic materials or other deleterious materials. E. Admixture: Water -reducing and/or retarding compatible (ASTM C494, Type A, Type D) as recommended by the manufacturer. Calcium Chloride shall not be used. F. Steel Plates: Structural quality, hot -rolled carbon steel complying with ASTM A-36 or ASTM A-283, Grade C. G. Structural -Size Steel Shapes: ASTM A-36. H. Bar Shapes, Flats and Rounds: ASTM A-36 or ASTM.A-306, Grade 65. I. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A-307, low -carbon steel bolts, regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel washers. J. Finish of Steel Units: All units shall be galvanized per ASTM A-153. K. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A-15 and ASTM A-305 for bars and ASTM 185 for welding steel fabric. L. Grout: Non -shrink, flowable, high strength grout, "Masterflow 713 Grout" manufactured by Master Builders. 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Concrete: Concrete shall obtain a strength of 5000 psi minimum at 28 days. B. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent the formation of seams or planes of weakness in precast units. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete in each precast unit by internal and external vibration without dislocation or damage to reinforcement and built-in items. C. Surface Finish: Color texture and gradation of finished surface shall match sample in Engineer's office/existing adjacent building. Finish shall be on all surfaces exposed to view. Unexposed surfaces shall have smooth as cast or float finish. Finish shall be obtained by form liners. D. Dimensional Tolerance: Fabricate precast concrete units complying with the dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL-117, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Comply with Reference Standards for applicable methods of form -work and reinforcement, concrete mixing, placing,. curing and finishing, and as herein specified. 03450 - 3 F. Built -In Anchorages: Accurately position built-in anchorage devices and secure to the formwork. Locate anchorages where they do not affect the position of main reinforcement of the placing of concrete. Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. G. Identification: Provide permanent markings in precast ,., units to identify pick-up points and orientation in the structure, complying with the markings indicated on the final shop drawings. Imprint the date of casting on each precast unit where it will not show in the finished structure. H. Curing by low-pressure steam, by steam vapor, by radiant heat and moisture, or other similar process may be employed to accelerate concrete hardening and to reduce the curing time. PART 3 - EXECUTION• 3.01 INSTALLATION: a A. Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before the start of such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions are required for installation. �. B. Do not install precast units until concrete has attained its design ultimate compressive strength. C. Install precast concrete members plumb, level and in alignment within the specified limits of erection tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as members are being permanently connected. D. Erection Tolerance: Install precast units without exceeding the following tolerance limits: 1. Variations from Plumb: 1/4" in any 20' run or story height; 1/2" total in any 40' or longer run. 2. Variations from Level or Elevation: 1/4" in any 20' run; 1/2" in any 40' run; total plus or minus 1/2" at any location. 3. Variation from Theoretical Position in Plan: Plus or minus 1/4" maximum at any location. 4. Offsets in Alignment: 1/16" in any 101 run; 1/4" maximum. .5. Warpage: Per 8 feet, 1/811. 6. Depth: Plus or minus 1/411. E. Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, and other accessories required for installation of precast units. F. Anchor units in final position by bolting or welding, unless otherwise shown on drawings. At bolted p-- connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts, weld where shown or required. G. Precast units shall be adequately braced and supported A during erection to insure proper alignment and safety; and such bracing on support shall be maintained until there are adequate permanent connections. Tack weld all bolted connections after final adjustment. 03450 - 4 H. Units shall be installed with uniform spacing between each unit. All units shall be plumb and each projecting from the structure on true alignment. Units damaged during fabrication, transport or erection shall be ,repaired or replaced at no added cost to the Owner. I. Permanent connections shall not be made until.all units supported by beams have been loaded on that beam. Check and adjust any panels which do not have uniform joint dimension. J. Grout or bearing pads required at connections, beams, wall panels, and slabs for setting shall be of final thickness as shown on the Drawings. Completely fill the spaces between contact areas. Bearing pads shall be plastic strips, neoprene pads or steel plates. Grout shall be mixed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. K. At welded connections apply rust -inhibitive coating on damaged areas, same as shop -applied material. Use galvanized repair coating,on galvanized surfaces. 3.02 CLEANING: All exposed surfaces shall be cleaned of laitance, dirt, dust, abrasive material, etc., with a cleaner which will not cause harm to any of the materials. This Section Prepared by Joseph R. Rapier, P.E. End of Section 03450 - 5 SECTION 03510 - POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of poured gypsum roof deck is shown.on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. P., 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Section 07535 - Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following standards, except as otherwise indicated. 1. ASTM C 317 "Standard Specification for Gypsum Concrete" 2. ASTM C 956 "Installation of Cast -In -Place Gypsum Concrete". B. Product Data: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications with applicztion and installation instructions for gypsum concrete. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for items of work not clearly dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data,. when requested by the Architect. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Cold Weather Placement: Do not mix or place gypsum concrete " during weather when the temperature or project exposure will freeze the concrete before chemical set has taken place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Gypsm Concrete: Mill mixture of calcined gypsum and aggregate complying with ASTM C 317. 1. Provide Class "A" gypsum concrete (500 psi compressive strength) with not more than 12-1/2% weight of approved aggretate. .— B. Thicknesses: Fill to a thickness even with the top of the existing built-up roof, which is approximately.4" thick. C. Mix.Gypsum Concrete in accordance with mill mixture manufacturer's recommendations for the type of placement (hand or hose) operation employed. Do not exceed the amounts of water as determined by design mix criteria, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. °— D. Keep all mixing and placement equipment clean and free of hardened lumps -of gypsum concrete. 03510- 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which poured gypsum decking is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to.the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 GYPSUM CONCRETE: A. Conveying: Provide adequate equipment and personnel to insure a uniform, continuous flow of gypsum concrete at the point of delivery, without segregation and loss of material. B. Placing and Finishing: Do not interrupt placement of gypsum concrete until the entire panel or section is completed. Place material in one layer. C. Immediately after placement, screed and level to the required thickness and trowel to smooth, even plane. Use care to prevent spattering of supporting structure and walls. D. Cleaning and Repair: After deck has set and before roof application, scrape rough areas smooth, patch uneven areas with fresh gypsum concrete slurry and trowel patches smooth. E. Replace work that is damaged beyond repair as directed by Architect. F. Promptly clean spater from exposed walls and supporting structures before it sets. End of Section. 03510- 2 SECTION 04100 - MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide mortar and grout for masonry construction. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C5-59 (1974), Quicklime ASTM C91-75, Masonry Cement ASTM C144-76, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150-76, Portland Cement ASTM C27-76, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C270-73, Mortar for Unit Masonry B. Source Quality Control., Initial compressive strength laboratory tests in accordance with ASTM. C270. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Include product data sheets for each named product. B. Test Reports: If requested submit independent laboratory test reports of initial mortar tests, including design mix proportions, for each mortar. C. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials meet -specification requirements. D. Samples: Refer to sample wall requirements in Section 04200. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver and store manufactured products in original, unopened containers. B. Store cementitious ingredients in weather -tight enclosures and protect against contamination and warehouse set. Protect from freezing. C. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials.. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Heat mixing water when air temperature is below 40 deg. F. and heat aggregates when air temperature is below 32 deg. F., to assure mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F. and 120 deg. F. until used. B. Produce subsequent mortar batches within +/- 10 deg. F. of first batch. C. Do not heat water or sand above 120 deg. F. 04100- 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS• A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, except compying with the staining requirements of ASTM C91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali, Type I, II, or III. Provide natural color except white shall be used for natural stone work. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, non -staining. Prepared masonry cements may be used subject to Architect's approval. .C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5. E. Aggregates: ASTM C144. Use natural white sand or ground white stone for white mortar at natural stone, color to match stone. F. Water: Clean and potable, free of organic matter. G. Shrinkage Control Admixture: Hydratite Plus by Grace Construction Products. 2.02 MIXES: A. Mortar Mix Masonry: 1. ASTM C270, proportion specifications, Type N. 2. Minimum compressive strength of 750 psi in 28 days. 3. Maximum air content 120. 4. Incorporate shrinkage control admixture in mortar at rate of 1 lb.per bag of cement and 1 lb. per cu. ft. of lime. 5. Incorporatecolorpigment in mortar for brick masonry in amounts required to achieve desired color/match existing mortar color. B. Mixing Procedures: 1. Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight. 2. Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for 3 to 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. 3. Add maximum amount of water to produce workable consistency. 4. If mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or absorption of a part of mixing water, re -temper by adding water and re -mix. 5. Use mortar and grout within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing. 6. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. 2.03 GROUT: A. Grout for filling of reinforced cells and door frames in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 28 days. B. Aggregate for masonry grout shall meet Uniform Building Code No.24-23, 1976 Edition. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/8 inch. Fine aggregates shall meet ASTM C33 and shall consist of clean, hard sand. 04100- 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Installation of mortar and grout is specified in Section 04200. - 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Control mortar•batching by measuring materials by volume in accordance with approved mix design proportions. Maintain uniform mortar color for entire work. End of Section. 04100- 3 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide unit masonry construction shown and as noted on the plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Mortar and Grout - Section 04100 Caulking and Sealing - Section 07900 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. A. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit certificates attesting compliance with applicable specifications for grades, types, and classes and strengths of brick units. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for each.named product. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A..Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Local Building Codes 2. Source Quality Control: Testing Reports of each masonry unit as specified above. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: A. Store masonry materials off ground. B. During freezing weather, protect masonry units with tarpaulins or other suitable material. C. Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Work: 1. During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof membrane at end of day or shutdown. 2. Cover partially -completed walls when work is not in progress. 3. Extend cover minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Staining: 1. Prevent mortar from staining face of masonry. 2. Immediately remove mortar in contact with face of masonry. 3. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings or mortar; protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction. 1.08 COORDINATION: A. Build openings and chases for heating, plumbing and electrical ducts, pipes and conduits into masonry walls. 04200 - 1 B. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashings, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs and frames. C. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their work to avoid cutting and patching. D. Cooperate with Roofer in locating flashing receivers and wall flashings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. CMU shall be manufactured standard units, 16" long x 8" high x 7-5/8" wide, unless otherwise indicated and of standard sizes required to accomplish work called for. B. CMU units at all firewalls to be rated fire block. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine other construction which is to support or interface with masonry work for conditions that would prevent proper installation of masonry. B. Where footings and shelves are not sound or level,,where anchorage devices have not been installed, where interferences exist, or where there are other conditions unsuitable for proper installation of masonry, do not start masonry work°until other construction has been corrected. 3.02 CMU INSTALLATION: -. A. Lay units plumb and true to lines, with level courses, head joints lined up vertically. Use no more than one cut closure in a length of wall. Line up closures vertically. B. Lay up units with completely -filled mortar joints. Do not furrow bed joints. Butter ends of brick with sufficient mortar to fill head joints, then shove in place. Rock closures in place with head joints thrown against 2 adjoining brick in place. C. Tap each unit to line and level as it is placed. Do not disturb any one unit once in place, except to remove completely and set in fresh bed of mortar. D. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they have been set in position. Where an adjustment must be made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. E. Make cuts with a power masonry saw. Do not use saw -cut faces in exposed work. F. Lay up only units which have no chipped, cracked or discolored exposed faces. Lay up with good face showing. G. Lay units in common running bond unless otherwise noted. Lay rowlocks, soldiers and patterns or special coursing as detailed. H. Provide at least 2 courses of brick under steel beams bearing on masonry walls and 1 course under steel joists, unless bond beams are shown. �. 04200 - 2 J. Keep cavity and wall clean and free of mortar droppings Excess mortar on cavity shide shall be cut off with trowel 3.03 JOINTING: A. Provide tightly -tooled joints to match adjacent CMU construction. 3.04 BUILDING IN OTHER WORK: A. Build in lintels, door frames, windows, flashing, inserts, anchors, blocking, sleeves, wall plugs, boxes, cabinets, piping, conduit, and other items, whether provided as part of masonry work, as preparation for other work or furnished by other trades. B. Full grout hollow metal door frames in masonry walls with mortar. C. Provide passage for electrical and mechanical lines. Make provisions for passage of lines, and other chases and openings, during laying up of masonry, so that later cutting is not necessary. Fill holes after lines and boxes are in place. D. Provide special jamb units where required to execute control joint details. Maintain sealant clearances at door opening. E. Provide lintels at opening in masonry work as necessary to form opening for in -wall equipment, through -wall ducts and piping, and as otherwise needed to support openings over 8" wide. Set lintels in full beds of mortar. 3.05 CLEANING AND POINTING A. At completion of masonry work, inspect masonry for defective joints. B. Cut out and repoint defective joints. Fill holes and tool smooth. C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final pointing. D. Clean exposed masonry surfaces with stiff fiber brush and clear water. No metal cleaning tools will be permitted. E. Acid solutions for cleaning shall be used only upon recommendation of the product manufacturer and approval of the Architect. Follow manufacturer's instructions. F. Leave work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry. End of Section. 04200 - 3 SECTION.05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide miscellaneous metal work as detailed, including anchors, fasteners, hardware and accessories. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Precast Concrete Facing Panels - Section 03450 1.04 QUALITY STANDARDS: A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except as otherwise shown and specified. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and. Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including "Commentary of the AISC Specification". AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction." 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate each item being furnished, including materials, quantities, sizes, shapes, locations, connections and fasteners. Designate shop and field welds in accordance with AWS standard symbols. Furnish setting diagrams, erection plans, templates and directions for installation of backing plates, embedded anchors and other items. B. Product Data: For each catalog item, submit manufacturer's product data sheet indicating product description and installation recommendations. Submittal " shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Properly identify and mark items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Deliver embedded items to site in accordance with concrete construction schedule. C. Store products completely clear of ground and covered to avoid damage by elements. " 1.07 COORDINATION: Coordinate with other trades where their work is affected by miscellaneous metal work. 05500 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel: ASTM A36. B. Steel Gratings: ASTM A569. C. Fasteners: Furnish galvanized with galvanized items. 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Expansion Bolts: Self -drilling anchors, Red Head Self -Drilling Series, or equal. E.,Galvanized Touch-up: Galvicon or ZRC compound. 2.02 FABRICATION - GENERAL: A. Fabricate work true to shape, size and tolerances, as detailed, with straight lines, square corners or smooth bends; free from twists. B. Grind and dress edges and ends of metal smooth, with no sharp edges and with.corners slightly rounded. C. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 and approved Shop Drawings. Grind welds smooth and at decorative items, polish to uniform surface or radius. D. Construction connections and joints exposed to weather to exclude water. E. Provide sufficient type, quantity and size of anchors for proper fastening of items. Fastenings shall be concealed wherever possible. F. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades. G. Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installations. 2.03 FABRICATED PRODUCTS: A. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, angles, plates, connections and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. Hot -dip galvanize items on all items. B. Frame Supports: Steel angles with welded and bolted connections. 2.05 FINISHES: Galvanized Finish: Zinc coating, ASTM A123. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Examine structure and surfaces for defects that would prevent proper installation of miscellaneous metal items. Report discrepancies. B. Field measure related work and openings as required for proper fit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 05500 - 2 B. Install plumb and level, anchored rigid and secure, and in true alignment with related and adjoining work. C. Field weld members in accordance with AWS D1.1. Grind exposed welds smooth. �^ D. Provide anchoring devices and fasteners for properly installing items. E. Upon completion, re-examine work and correct to insure that installation is firm, tight, anchored, in true alignment with neat fits, without distortions, unsightly fastenings, raw edges or protrusions. F. Touch-up field welded areas with specified shop paint. Use specified galvanized touch-up at galvanized items. a This Section.Prepared by Joseph R. Rapier, P.E. End of Section 05500 - 3 SECTION 07514 - ROOFING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Utilize this Roofing Specification for Bid Item #2 work. Provide built-up roofing patchwork and flashing in conjunction with all airconditioning renovations at existing roof deck for a complete new installations. See mechanical drawings and details for type, quantity and location of units to be installed. Provide walk boards around the entire perimeter or each roof top unit. Provide gypsum deck demolition for mechanical curb installations. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS: A. Roof top unit curbs and frames for same will be furnished by the mechanical contractor and set by the Roofing Contractor; wood and steel curbs by the General Contractor; roof top unit perimeter rigid insulation, cant strips and flashing by the Roofing Contractor. 1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Mechanical - Division 15000 Electrical — Division 16000 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Subcontract the roofing and associated work to a single firm specializing in the type(s) of roofing required, so that,there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the work. A. UL Ratings: Provide materials and roofing systems which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL for the following Class or Rating as roofing: Provide "Class A" rating, except as otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturer of Built -Up Roofing Materials: Obtain primary built-up roofing materials from a single manufacturer, who publishes complete information on the required system, and offers to guarantee or bond completed roofing installation. Obtain secondary materials from sources acceptable to the manufacturer of the primary materials. C. Manufacturer: One of the following:, Manville Corp. GAF Corp. Celotex Corp. Manufacturer of built-up roofing is further limited to one who is willing to participate in the Pre -Roofing Conference as required. 1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major roofing product or system required. Include 07514- 1 certification or other data substantiating compliance with the requirements. Submittal shall be in accordance -' with Section 01340. B. Guarantee on Roofing: Furnish, in duplicate, two year guarantee on roofing and associated work specified in this Section, agreeing to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as roofing, due to failure of materials or workmanship. Guarantee shall be signed by the Contractor and Roofing Subcontractor. C.'Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing of each drawing for fabricated items. Before any fabrication is begun, shop drawings of all flashing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The drawings shall show guages and types of metal, method of assembly and/or anchorage, shapes,dimensions and finishes. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: Proceed with reroofing work only after substrate has been cleanded and repaired as required and penetrating work have been completed. A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions -. under which roofing work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Pre -Roofing Conference: Meet at the project well in advance of the time schedule for roofing work, and review requirements for the work and conditions which could possibly interfere with successful performance of the work. Require every party who is concerned with the work, or required to coordinate with it or to protect it ® thereafter, to attend the conference. C. Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILT-UP ROOFING: Materials: Manville Ventsulation Felt Manville Glass Ply per ASTM b-2178 Type IV (3 plies) 170 Roofing Asphalt -Type II per ASTM b-312.78 Application: Method as per manufacturer recommendations. 2.02 PREFORMED CANT STRIPS: Wherever preformed cant strips of insulation material are shown, provide units supplied by the manufacturer of the associated roof and deck insulation, and formed of the same material. If such units are not produced by the roof and deck insulation manufacturer, provide units formed of asphalt impregnated organic fiber insulation material, unless otherwise shown. 07514- 2 2.03 ROOFING ASPHALT:.As.recommended by roofing material manufacturer for the roof slopes shown on the drawings. 2.04 BASE FLASHING: Combination Flashing: Reinforced flashing sheet for flashing .construction. Approximate weight of 65 lbs. per 36" roll. 2.05 MECHANICAL FASTENERS: As recommended by the roofing material manufacturer for the roof deck to receive,roofing. 2.06 FLASHING CEMENT: ASTM D2822-75. 2.07 SHEET METAL MATERIAL: Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A361, treated to hold paint, galvanized, not less than 24 guage unless otherwise specified. Preformed Gravel Stops and Fascia Trim: Gravel stops and facia trim to be pre -finished steel of not less than 26 guage, color as selected by Architect. 2.08 SEALANT: Equal to Sonneborn Sonolastic one -part joint sealing compound. 2.09 WALKWAY PROTECTION BOARD: 1/2" thick x 36" wide x length required equal to Tex -Mastic Roof Walkways by J & P Petroleum Products. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL A. Inspect all surfaces to receive roofing and report any defective base conditions to the Architect. Notify roofing material manufacturer in advance prior to date the job is to start. B. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Cant strips of asphalt impregnated fiberboard shall be required at all curb flashings. D. Lay no roofing unless the ambient temperature is at least 40 degrees F. and rising. E. Do not apply roofing if damp weather is imminent or if other conditions exist that will not permit proper application. Do not apply roofing when moisture is present in or on the deck. Do not apply wet or damp roofing felts. F. Comply with instructions of the primary built-up roofing materials manufacturer, and comply with the requirements for bonding or guaranteeing by the manufacturer, including flashing endorsement. 1. Remove all existing aggregate from existing roof deck where penetrations and walk board are to be installed. 2. Prior to the application of Ventsulation Felt make random cuts or breaks in old membrane to permit escape of moisture from the deck fill. 3. Over the old membrane, which has been cut to allow moisture to escape, apply one layer of Ventsulation Felt dapping each felt the 1" selvage. End joints to be lapped 4". If the deck is nailable, nail the laps at 9" 07514- 3 centers and down the longitudinal center of each felt nail two rows of nails with the rows spaced approximately 11" apart and nails staggered on approximately 18" centers. Use nails or fasteners appropriate to the type of deck. If the deck is .- non-nailable the Ventsulation Felt shall be secured to the deck with spots of hot asphalt spaced on 24" centers. 3.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE: A. Do not apply hot bitumen under any condition that would cause foaming. Test substrate for excessive moisture by pouring one pint of steep asphalt at 400 degrees F. on the deck at the start of each day's work, and at the start of each roof area or plane. B. Do not exceed the temperature limitation recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer for the heating of bitumen. Remove overheated material from the site without delay. Provide a clearly visible thermometer on each kettle or delivery truck used to heat bitumen. C. Lay multiple -ply courses of felt and hot bitumen in shingle fashion, unless,single plies or crossed plies are necessary -- in order to.comply with the recommendation of the roofing materials manufacturer. Do not lap felts against the direction of drainage. Start installation of roofing at lowest line across roof (valleys and eaves of .pitched roofs)'. D. Apply the felt and hot bitument courses, complying with recommendations by the roofing material manufacturer. E. Broom each ply to assure complete embedment. 3.03 ROOFING CONSTRUCTION AT EDGES AND PENETRATIONS: ;.., A. Install preformed cant strips at curb intersections and elsewhere as shown. B. Extend courses of base sheet felts, and hot bitumen to top of cant strips or edge strips. At obstructions in deck and at edges where roofing is not turned up by a cant strip, extend courses of felt and hot bitumen to obstruction of edge of deck. Provide a folded -back envelope of coated felt to prevent the flow of bitumen into the building or off the edge. When envelope installation is not feasible, provide a large bead of roofing cement to restrict the flow of bitumen. C. Nail edges of roofing wherever possible to top of cant strip or to wood blocking or to the deck before applying combination base flashing or stripping. Comply with roofing materials manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide combination flashing at cant strip and other sloping and vertical surfaces, and at major penetrations -- through the roof deck. Provide the products and systems recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer, but (as acceptable to the Architect) equivalent to or not less than one ply of felt and one ply of reinforced flashing, each set in a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto the deck 6" and 4" respectively. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of composition flashing to 07514- 4 vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer. Except where concealed by flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over the combination flashing. 3.04 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommen- dations for handling and installation of flashing and sheet metal work. 2. Performance: Coordinate the work with other work for the correct sequencing of items which make up the entire membrane or system of waterproofing or waterproofing and rain drainage. It is required that the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations. 3. Installation of Metal Work: Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply with SMACMA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of the work. For non-moving seams provide soldered flat -lock seams, except as otherwise indicated. Comply with metal producers recommendations for tinning, soldering and cleaning the joints. 4. Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15'0" running length. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edges, to form a hem. B. Do not proceed with the installation of flashing and sheet metal work until curb and substrate construction, cant stripes, blocking, reveivers and other construction to receive the work is completed. C. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and sheet metal work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work. until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. D. Miscellaneous Flashings and Details: Miscellaneous roofing details not specially mentioned in these specifications such as pitch pans, expansion joints, flashings at projections through roofs, etc., shall be in strict compliance with recommended procedures outlined by the manufacturer, subject to the Architect's approval. 3.05 WALK BOARDS: A. General installation requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommen- dations for handling and installation. End of Section. 07514- 5 SECTION 07536 - MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Use the roofing system herein described for reroofing work as called for in Bid Item #2, Alternate #2; or Item #2, Alternate #3 work on the plans. Access and protection thereof to designated materials loading zones shall be provided as noted on the plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS: A. Equipment curbs and frames for same will be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and set by the Roofing Contractor; rigid curb insulation, cant strips, perlite board, and flashing will be furnished and installed by the Roofing Contractor. 1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Sheet Metal Flashing - Section 07600 Caulking and Sealants - Section 07900 Mechanical - Division 15000 Electrical - Division 16000 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Subcontract the roofing and associated work to a single firm specializing in the type(s) of roofing required, so that there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the work. A. UL Ratings: Provide materials and roofing systems which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL for the following Class or Rating as roofing: Provide UL 90 "Class A" rating. B. Manufacturer of Roofing Materials: Obtain primary roofing materials from a single manufacturer, who publishes complete information on the required system, and offers to ^- guarantee or bond completed roofing installation. Obtain secondary materials from sources acceptable to the manufacturer of the primary materials. .., C. Manufacturers: Siplast, Inc. Performance Building Products, Inc. 1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major roofing product or system required. Include certification or other data substantiating compliance with the requirements. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 07536- 1 B. Guarantee on Roofing: Furnish, in duplicate, ten year guarantee on roofing and associated work specified in this Section, agreeing to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as roofing, due to failure of materials or workmanship. Guarantee shall be signed by the Contractor and Roofing Subcontractor. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing of each drawing for fabricated items. Before any fabrication is begun, shop drawings of all flashing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The drawings shall show guages and types of metal, method of assembly and/or anchorage, shapes, dimensions and finishes. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: Proceed with reroofing work only after substrate has been cleaned and repaired as required and penetrating work have been completed. A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which roofing work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Pre -Roofing Conference: Meet at the project well in advance of the time schedule for roofing work, and review requirements for the work and conditions which could possibly interfere with successful performance of the work. Require every party who is concerned with the work, or required to coordinate with it or to protect it thereafter, to attend the conference. C. Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's -recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Roofing to consist of: 1. Retro-fit Board as manufactured by Manville, or equal. Size: 1/2" x 24" x 48". 2. Fesco Board as manufactured by Manville, or equal. Size: 1-1/2" or 3/4" x 24" x 48". 3. Glass -reinforced asphalt elastomer sheet having a minimum weight of 60 pounds/square, type Paradiene 20FR; or Permax B Base FR-II. 4. Glass -reinforced asphalt elastomer sheet with mineral surfacing havinga minimum weight of 87 pounds/square, type Paradiene 30FR, color: tan; or Permax PO-Xtra FR, color: slate. B. Membrane flashing shall consist of: 1. Glass -reinforced asphalt elastomer sheet having a minimum weight of 60 pounds/square, type Paradiene 20FR; or Permax B Base FR II. 07536-2 M_ C. Asphalt shall be certified for full compliance with the 'requirements,for Type IV asphalt listed in Table 1, ASTM D-312-71. Each container, or bulk shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous temperature (EVT), the finished blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point (F.P.). D. Asphalt primer to be ASTM D-41-73, Type PA-1125. E. Plastic cement shall be asphalt cutback, reinforced with non -asbestos fibers, type PA-01021. F. Pitch pan filler to be two component, cold appied, polymeric asphalt compound of pouring consistency, type PS-714. G. Sealant to be a high grade neoprene -based material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Inspect all surfaces to receive defective base conditions to the material manufacturer in advance to start. 3. All work shall be in accordance recommendations. roofing and report any Engineer. Notify roofing prior to date the job is with manufacturer's C. Comply with instructions of the primary built-up roofing materials manufacturer, and comply with the requirements for bonding or guaranteeing by the manufacturer, including flashing endorsement. 3.02 DEMOLITION: A. Remove and dispose of the existing metal counter flashing in all areas to be reroofed. B. Remove and dispose of the BUR system and the one inch of fiberglass insulation board down to the gypsum deck surface. 3.03 DECK PREPARATION: A. Repair the deck smooth from any damage to the surface due to the tear off. Use a gypsum fill compound material to patch surface irregularities. B. If the Base Bid Item #2, Alternate #3 is taken, then this contractor shall also repair electrical work penetrations. (Allow 21 12"x12"x3" areas per mechanical area). Fill areas where conduit penetrates the gypsum deck with a gypsum fill compound material. 3.04 INSULATION FORBID ITEM #2, ALTERNATE #2: A. Hot mop apply a 1/2" wood fiber board over all the exposed gypsum deck areas after they. have been prepared. Install 1/2" board per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 INSULATION FOR BID ITEM #2, ALTERNATE #3: A. When electrical renovation to the lighting fixtures and sound system conduits are installed, the roofing contractor shall install a 1-1/2" wood fiber board atop all the exposed gypsum deck, with cutouts to allow for conduit.runs. Cuts to the conduit shall be tight fitting. A second 3/4" wood fiber 07536- 3 board shall be installed over the first thickness of board. Both layers will be installed utilizing a hot mopped asphalt application per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 APPLICATION: A. General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Appliation of roofing shall immediately follow application of insulation as a continuous operation. B. Prime metal flanges and concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of PA-1125 asphalt primer. C. All flanges shall be set in a smooth, even, continuous coating of PA-1021 plastic cement. D. Kettles and tankers shall be equipped with acurate, fully readable thermometers. Asphalt shall not be heated to or above its FP. Avoid heating at or above the FBT; should conditions make this prohibition impracticable, and exception is grated by the Architect, heating above the FBT must not be done for more than four (4) hours. Application temperatures must be not more than 250F (14°C) below the EVT nor more than 25°F (14°C) above the EVT. If EVT information is not provided, the following asphalt temperature limits shall be observed: Maximum heating temperature shall be: Type IV - 525°F. Minimum application temperature shall be 400°F. Cutting or alteration of bitumens will not be permitted. All moppings shall be a maximum of 25 pounds/square, and shall be total in coverage, leaving no breaks or voids. E. HOT APPLICATION: 1. Approved insulation should be installed according to manufacturer's recomendations and Factory Mutual requirements. The edges of insulation units should be in moderate contact without forcing, cut to fit neatly against adjoining surfaces. The insulation layer should present a smooth surface to accept the roof membrane. 2. Beginning at the low point of the roof, fully mop 1 ply of Paradiene 20 to the insulation surface, lapping sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. 3. Beginning again at the low point of the roof, fully mop 1 ply of Paradiene 30 to the Paradiene 20 surface, lapping sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. Stagger laps between plies. F. All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths and shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck. Sheets shall be laid directly behind the asphalt applicator. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets. Paradiene 20 shall be fully bonded to the prepared substrate and shall have a minimum of three (3) inch side and end laps. Paradiene 30 shall be fully bonded to the Paradiene 20 surface and shall have a minimum of three (3) inch side and end laps. Laps seams in the Paradiene 20 layer should not coincide with.the laps of the Paradiene 30 layer. The courses should be staggered to ensure this. 07536- 4 G. Flashing shall be accomplished using Paradiene 20 reinforcing membrane. The reinforcing sheet shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself and shall extend a. minimum of four (4) inches onto the Paradiene 20 surface and three (3) inches up the parapet wall. The flashing sheet shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself and shall extend a minimum of six (6) inches onto the Paradiene 30 surface and eight (8) inches, up the parapet wall. Lap seams in .the reinforcing layer shall never coincide with the laps of the Veral layer. The reinforcing sheet shall be [torched in place/adhered by a mopping of asphalt and mechanically attached to the wall at the leading edge.] All flashing sheets shall be cut off the end of the roll and be applied vertically, always working to a selvage edge. ... H. The interior of all pitch pans and the projection passing through the pitch pan shall be cleaned and primed with PA-1125 asphalt primer. Primer shall be allowed to dry thoroughly. Pitch pans shall be completely filled with PS-714, sloped to channel water to the roof. I. All Paradiene 30 edges exposed at gravel stops, waste stacks, vent stacks etc., shall be caulked with neoprene- �^ based sealant. J. At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, a water cut-off shall be built at all open edges. Cut-offs can be built using asphalt or plastic cement and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing. End of Section. 07536- 5 SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL FLASHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide sheet metal flashing for modified bitumen roofing as specified for Bid Item #2, Alternate #2. See drawing details and notes for location and quantity of sheet metal flashings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing - Section 07535 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major product or system required. Include certification or other data substantiating compliance with the requirements. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing of each fabricated item. Before any fabrication is begun, shop drawings of all flashing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The drawings shall show guages and types of metal, method of assembly and/or anchorage, shapes, dimensions and finishes. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: Proceed with sheet metal work only after substrate construction, mechanical curbing, and penetrating work have been completed. The Installer must examine the substrate and the -conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Sheet Metals: 1. Flashing zinc coated steel, ASTM A361, 24 guage with minimum 1.25 oz/sq.ft. 2. Pitch pockets - Galvanized steel, ASTM A526, 24 guage .with minimum 1.25 oz/sq.ft. galvanizing. B. Accessory Materials and Components: 1. Fasteners: Concealed hook, strip, or clip type; of same material and guage as flashings, sized to suit application. 2. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used. 3. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; FS SS-0000153a. 07600- 1 4. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. ~' 5. Sealant: One component acrylic, conforming to requirements to FS TT-S-00230; non -staining; non - bleeding; non -sagging; of color selected by ^^ Architect/Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Flashing 1. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance, in conformance with details shown on the drawings. 2. Form sections in the longest continuous length possible while still making allowances for expansion joints. 3. Seams are to be flat lock type except corners. Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18" mitered, soldered or welded, and sealed as one piece. 4. Wipe and wash clean, solder joints to remove traces or flux immediately after soldering. 5. Hem exposed edges of flashing on underside 1/2". 6. Fabricate flashings to allow it to extend minimum of 2" �^ horizontally over roofing and return brake edge. 7. Backpaint flashing with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. B. Pitch Pockets: 1. Conform to SMACNA Manual, Plate 61, Figure C. 2. 4" high wit hemmed edge, 4" flange all around, 2" greater in width and length than equipment enclosed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION: .� A. Verify that substrates, curbs, blockings, cants and other construction to receive sheet metal work are completed, securly fastened, clean and smooth, thoroughly dry and free of defects that could affect application. B. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02INSTALLATION: -- A. Flashings, Counter Flashings, and Valleys 1. Nailing a. Not over 8" on center and not less than 1/2" from edge. b. Do not nail through exposed face of flashings. 2. Jointing a. Overlap seams in direction of flow. ^ b. Make joints with flat -lock seams, 3/4" wide minimum or soldered lap seams 1" wide minimum. c. Make corner seams double locked. d. Provide expansion and concentration joints where indicated or at 32 ft. maximum intervals. Expansion joints shall be loose lock slip joints, sealed with plastic cement. 07600- 2 e. Comply with SMACNA manual, Plate 131, and other plates applicable to installations for specific seams and joints. 3. Soldering a. Thoroughly clean and treat metals in accordance with metal producer's recommendations prior to soldering. b. Apply flux compatible with sheet metal prior to soldering. c. Solder full width and length of seam or joint. d. Remove acid flux residue by neutralizing with ammonia or baking soda and rinsing with clear water. B. Pitch Pockets: Rework,existing pitch pans to provide a positive seal from moisture entry into the building. End of Section. 07600- 3 SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Exterior sealants shall be provided as required to seal all joints occuring between dissimilar materials. Joints between precast concrete panels at all the exterior sides .� and all the interior sides between P.C. panels and cast concrete work (see Cooling Tower Plans.) Follow all manufacturer's recommendations of proper installation of sealants. B. Provide interior caulking in.conjunction with interior painting operations. Caulk all joints between dissimilar materials including H.M. frames, louvers, and other items mounted through walls. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. •'^ 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Precast Concrete Panels - Section 03400 Unit Concrete Masonry - Section 04200 Painting - Section 09900 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit manufacturer's name and product proposed for use, and manufacturer's color charts for Architect's selections and approval. Submittal shall be in accordance,with Section 01340. -- B. Samples and Test Reports: For materials other than those specified, furnish a unit sample of each material proposed (include primer), accompanied by certified independent laboratory test reports showing that materials to be furnished have been tested and meet requirements of applicable contract documents and manufacturer's certification that no major formula change has taken place since date of test. Sample containers shall be labeled as to supplier, name of material, specifications numbers, and colors. Include letters or published recommendations by manufacturer to support selection and compatibility of various related materials with respect to type of joints for.which each material is intended. C. Upon completion of the job, furnish a list of all caulks and sealants used, as well as blueprint marked with the installed locations of each. Provide one tube of each type of caulk and/or sealant to the Owner. Include a copy of the -^ invoice from the caulk vendor for future acquisition by the Owner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Sonneborn division of Contech 2. Pecora Chemical Corp. 3. Tremco Mfg. Co. 07900- 1 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from weather. 1.07 GUARANTEE: Provide Owner a written guarantee which shall guarantee sealant operations to be free of leaks and defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Sealant: (Exterior and Interior Joints Subject to Movement) 1. Qualities: One part non -sag polysulfide base synthetic rubber sealant. Manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. 2. Standards: FS TT-S-0027E, Type II, Non -sag Class B; FS-TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A, Gun Grade. B. Interior Caulking: 1. Type: Acrylic Latex capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints. Pecora AC-20 acrylic Latex -Caulk. 2. Conformance: ASTM C 834-76 3. Consistency: Gun Grade 4. Colors: As selected by the A-E for the particular use. C. Joint Backing: Closed cell polythylene joint backing material as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Select a size that will cause about 30% compression in joint. D. Bond=Preventive Materials: Polyethelene tape, pressure - sensitive adhesive or masking tape, FS UU-T-106. E. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each type of working surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be smooth, dry, sound. Brush and wipe surfaces dust free. Remove oil, grease, release agents, coatings, or other contaminates from surface. B. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. C. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to Architect. D. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.02 JOINT SIZES AND BACKING: A. Sealant: Minimum and maximum joint sizes shall recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown drawings. Use joint backing material to control joints. In joints 1/2 and wider, depth equal to with minimum depth of 1/4". B. Caulking: Depth equal to 3 times joint width. . be as on depth of 1/2 width 07900- 2 3.03 APPLICATION: A. Joint Backer: Install joint backer to achieve required depth of joints. Where not used, install a bond -preventive material in joint. . B. Sealant: Apply sealant to joints prior to water repellant or clear coating operations. Apply sealant within 8 hours after primer has dried. Gun -apply sealant, completely filling joint. Tool joints smooth and wrinkle free. C. Caulking: Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun -having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bead, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. .. 3.04 USE LOCATIONS: A. Use Exterior Joint Sealant where indicated on drawings and following: 1. Around perimeter of all exterior door and window frames. 2. Around perimeter of all pipes, conduit, mechanical or electrical devices, and other items built into or penetrating exterior walls. --- 3. At thresholds: Provide full bed for exterior thresholds. 4. As otherwise required to make building airtight and weathertight. 5. At control joints in unit masonry walls. 6. At all joints in precast concrete panels. B. Use Interior Caulking at all interior joints in materials requiring a painted or stained finish and as -directed by Architect/Engineer. 3.05 CLEANING: Remove excess sealant and caulking materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. Solvent recommended by manufacturer may be used to remove sealant. Remove debris from site. End of Section. 07900- 3 SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Furnish manufactured hollow metal doors or door frames where scheduled or noted on plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Caulking & Sealants - Section 07900 Painting - Section 09900 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer and supplier of hollow metal doors and frames shall show proof of at least 5 years experience in fabricating custom hollow metal work. Manufacturer is subject to Architect's approval and, if requested, shall submit a list of recent local representative projects completed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate each type of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. Also indicate field splice joints, hardware locations and reinforcement, and other misc. items B. Samples: Submit following samples if requested: (1) 12" x 12" section of door showing internal construction, edge detail, and butt reinforcement (2) 12" x 12" "L" section of frame showing corner detail. 1.06 DELIVERY AND'STORAGE: Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent damage and deterioration. Provide individual cardboard containers for doors. Store doors and frames upright in a protected dry area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIAL: A. Sheet steel for frames: Cold rolled commercial quality carbon steel, ASTM A366. B. Sheet steel for doors: Cold rolled stretcher leveled sheet steel,ASTM A366. 2.02 DOOR FRAMES: A. Combination type with integral stop and trim, fabricated to profiles and shapes detailed with 16 ga. steel for interior frames, 14 ga.steel for exterior frames. B. Corners and connections mitered and welded with exposed welds ground flush and smooth. 08100- 1 C. Provide 16 ga. jamb anchors at 2'-5" o.c. (min. 3 per jamb)suitable for fastening to, adjacent construction. Provide adjustable 14 ga.sill anchor at bottom of each jamb for fastening to floor. Provide removable steel spreaders at bottom. Provide mullion anchors where required. D. Machine, mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames for attachment of finish hardware. Reinforcing shall be not less than the following: Hinge and Pivot reinforcements - 7 gage, 1-1/2' x 10" minimum size Strike reinforcements - 12 gage Flush bolt reinforcements - 12 gage Closer reinforcements - 12 gage Reinforcements for: surface -mounted hardware - 12 gage hold -open arms - 12 gage surface panic devices - 12 gage Provide for 3 rubber silencers at each strike jamb on single doors,and provide for 2 at heads of pairs of doors. E. where required, provide applied stops formed of 18 gage steel with corners closely fitted and secured at 12" o.c. with countersink #4-40 Phillips head machine screws. -- F. Provide mortar guards at all hardware mortises. 2.03 DOORS: A. Face sheets shall be of 16 guage steel on exterior doors, 18 ga. steel on interior doors, with no visible joints or seams. B. Provide internal stiffeners of 20 gage steel, space at 6" o.c. and welded to face sheets at 5" o.c. Fill space between stiffeners with sound deadening material, minimum 3 lb. density. C. Provide continuous 18 gage channel reinforcement spot welded around perimeter of door. Close tops of exterior doors. D. Door edges shall be fully welded, ground smooth, with no visible seams on faces or edges. E. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors for attachment of finish hardware. Reinforcement shall be not less than the following: Hinge and pivot reinforcements - 7 gage Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts - 7 gage concealed holders, concealed or surface -mounted closures - 11 gage Reinforcements for all other surface -mounted hardware - 11 gage 2.04 FINISH: Remove oil, dirt, and grease from exposed surfaces of doors and frames and apply a mineral filler to assure a smooth surface. Apply 1 shop coat of zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer, baked on. 08100-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES: A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions. Hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and square. B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. C. Leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and%plumb, and anchors are securely attached. D. Make field splices in accordance with Shop Drawing details. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DOORS: Install doors with 1/16" clearance at head and jamb, 1/2" clearance at floors, and 1/4" clearance at thresholds with no binding. 3.03 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer. End of Section. 08100- 3 SECTION 08330 - ROLLING SERVICE DOOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Rolling service door shall be Model BN4 as manufactured by the Overhead Door Corporation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. .., 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Opening preparation, miscellaneous or structural metal work and finish and field painting, are in the Scope of Work of the other divisions or as noted. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 CURTAIN A. Slats: shall be type F-265 flat crown, pitch 2-5/8", depth of crown 5/8" minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel. B. Endlocks: shall be used on alternate slats. Windlocks shall be used as required to meet design wind load, minimum 20 psf. C. Bottom Bar: shall be two steel angles 2" x 1-1/2 x r 3/16 Provide a loop type PVC weatherseal on bottom bars. 2.02 GUIDES A. Guides: shall be roll formed steel shapes. Guides shall be 2. structural steel angles 3/16" minimum thickness. B. Guides: shall be equipped with windlock bars as required to meet design windload. 2.03 BRACKETS A. Brackets: shall be minimum 3/16" thick steel plate to support the barrell, counterbalance, and hood. 2.04 COUNTERBALANCE A. Counterbalance: shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrell, supporting the curtain with a deflection limited to .03" per foot of width. B. Counterbalance: shall be adjustable by means of an external adjusting tension wheel. 2.Q5 HOOD A. Hood: shall be 24 guage galvanized steel minimum. 2.06 FINISH A. Curtains & Hood: shall be galvanized per ASTM A 525 Standards and shall receive a baked on prime coat of manufacturer's standard paint prior to roll forming. 08330- 1 B. All non -galvanized, exposed, ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of manufacturer's standard factory applied rust inhibitive primer. 2.07 OPERATION A. Doors shall be manual push up operation. 2.08 LOCKING A. Manual push up doors shall have interior, coil side, slide bolt.locks suitable for padlocks by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Rolling Service Door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and standards. B. Installation shall be by authorized manufacturer's representatives. End of Section. 08330- 2 SECTION 09200 - LATH & PLASTER (STUCCO PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Metal furring and.lathing. B. Three coat cement plaster system. C. Patch existing adjacent to new masonry wall construction as .., noted on the plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, '-' and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIED ELSEWHERE Section 04200 - Unit Masonry - Substrate for Lathing Plaster Section 09900 - Painting - Water Repellent 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sample Panel: 1. Construct 12" long x 12" wide sample panel with finished surface, using materials and methods specified herein, for review by Architect/Owner. 2. Accepted surface finish of sample establishes minimum standard of quality and workmanship of cement plaster work on job. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C150 - "Portland Cement" - Type I B. ASTM C6 - "Normal Finishing Hydrated Lime". C. ASTM C206 - "Special Finishing Hydrated Lime". �-- D. ASTM A42.4 "Lathing and Furring". 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following for approval in accordance with Section 01340: 1. Product Data:. Stucco manufacturer's complete product data and installation instructions. 2. Samples: Stucco manufacturer's finish color chips for Owner's color selection. �- 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Bagged. Materials: 1. Deliver to site in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Store in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. B. Metal Lath: 1. Lay flat on hard substrate to prevent dimpling or distortion. 2. Store in weather protected environment clear of ground P-- and moisture. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is 40OF or r less and falling. 09200- 1 2. Provide heat and protection as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for a period of not less than 24 hours after application. 3. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of, heat on plaster near heat sources. B. Warm Weather Requirements: 1. Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation. 2. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Stucco Finish: 1,. United States Gypsum (USG) 2. El -Ray Stucco B. Metal Lath and Accessories 1. United Stated Gypsum (USG) 2. Dale Industries 3. Keene Corporation 2.02 MATERIALS A. Plaster: I. Cement: Normal - Type 1 Portland type, conforming to requirements of ASTM C150' grey color. 2. Hydrated Lime: Special -finishing type conforming to requirements of ASTM C206. 3. Stucco Finish Coat: Factory prepared product recommended by manfuacturer for application indicated. Color to match existing. Finish to match existing. 4. Aggregate: Natural sand, conforming to ASTM C35; graded within the following limits: SIEVE SIZE PERCENT RETAINED No. 4 0 No. 8 0 to 5 No. 16 10 to 30 No. 30 30 to 65 No. 50 65 to 95 No. 100 95 to 100 5. Water: Clean, potable fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, ,organic matter or other deleterious substances. B. Metal Lath and Accessories: 1. Lath: Self furring galvanized diamond mesh 3.5 lb. per sq. yd. 2. Control Joints: USG No. 100 zinc coated. 3. Casing Beads: USG No. 66 x 7/8" zinc coated. 4. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, staples and screws of type to secure lathing in place; galvanize coated. 2.02 MIXES A. Proportions: 1. Scratch Coat: 1 bag Portland Cement, 3/4.to 1 bag hydrated lime, 6 to 7 cu. ft. sand. 2. Brown Coat: 1 bag Portland Cement, 1. bag hydrated lime, 6 to 7 cu. ft. sand. 09200- 2 B. Measuring: 1. Accurately measure ingredients,.including water, using measuring devices of known volume. 2. Do not use shovel as measuring device. C. Mixing: 1. Use mechanical mixing equipment designed for purpose intended. 2. Use minimum amount of water required to produce proper workable consistency. 3. Mix materials for a minimum of 2 minutes or until mix presents a uniform color. 4. Mix finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION R., 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that substrates are sound, free of irregularities, dirt, laitance grease or other foreign matter. B. Substrate shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10'-0". 3.02 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION A. Metal Lath and Accessories 1. Install in accordance with ANSI A 42.4. 2. Install lath perpendicular to supports in gypsum sheathing substrates and in most economical direction over masonry substrate. 3. Lap ends minimum 1" and sides 1-1/2". 4..Secure laps with tie wire when occurring between supports.. 5. Place 4" wide x 12" long strips of lath diagonally at corners of all openings. 6. Secure lath and accessories to substrate with proper anchors spaced at 12" o.c. maximum. 7. Install control joints as indicated on drawings or to divide wall into panels not exceeding 125 sq. ft. with maximum dimension of 12'-0". Obtain architect/engineer approval of layout. B. Plaster: 1. Apply plaster using three coat system. 2. Place plaster within 2-1/2 hours after mixing, except during hot, dry weather, reduce placing time as required to prevent premature stiffening of plaster. 3. Do not re -temper stiffened plaster with additional water. 4. Apply first basecoat with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through metal reinforcing and "- to embed reinforcing.After first coat is firm, scratch (score) in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond for second coat.' On vertical surfaces, scratch in �- horizontal direction. 5. Apply second basecoat with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with first basecoat. Bring surface to a true,even plane by rodding, and float to a uniformly rough surface. Fill defects and scratches with plaster. 09200- 3 6. Apply scrath and brown basecoats to minimum thickness of 3/8" each. Moist cure and allow each coat to slowly dry for a minimum period of 48 hours. 7. Allow basecoats to cure for minimum 7 days prior to application of finish coat. B. Evenly dampen basecoat, to ensure uniform suction, and apply finish coat. Apply to thickness sufficient required for texture, but in no case less than 1/8". Apply finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 9. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/16" in loft. 10. Provide sample to match finish on precast concrete panels. 11. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay trowelling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface. 12. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours. 3.03 PATCHING A. Cut out and patch defects in workmanship and materials including but not limited to cracking, crazing, texture irregularities within a panel and spalling. B. Patches shall match adjacent surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove plaster and protective materials from metal accessories. y B. Remove plaster spatters and debris from other surfaces. C. Remove rubbish and all stucco droppings from site. End of Section. 09200- 4 SECTION 09230 - MARBLECRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This work includes all labor, materials, services, equipment and scaffolding required to complete the lathing and plastering of this project in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract? including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Section 03300 - Concrete Work 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Panel: Prior to application of marblecrete, not less than three (3) 2'-0" x 2'-0" test panels shall be made for the Architect's approval. ... 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C150 - "Portland Cement" - Type I B. ASTM C6 - "Normal Finishing Hydrated Lime". C. ASTM C206 - "Special Finishing Hydrated Lime". D. ASTM A42.4 - "Lathing and Furring". 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 01340: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's complete product data and installation instructions for accessories and additives. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Bagged Materials: 1. Deliver to site in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Store in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. B. Metal Lath: 1. Lay flat on hard substrate to prevent dimpling or distortion. 2. Store in weather protected enviroment clear of ground and moisture. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is 40°F or less and falling. -- 2. Provide heat and protection as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for a period of not less than 24 hours after application.. .3. Distribute heat uniformly to previcent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources. B. Warm Weather Requirements: 1. Protect plaster against uneven and excessive ^' evaporation. 09230- 1 2. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind. C. Mixing: 1. Measurements of ingredients shall be accurate, and successive batches shall be proportioned exactly alike. Portland cement and all other dry ingredients shall be mixed thoroughly before water is added. Color finish shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Thorough mixing will be enforced. All mixing tools and equipment shall be clean and free from partially hardened or hardened materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. METAL LATH: Or other metal reinforcement and application thereof, shall be as described by Texas Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association, Spec. latest issue. B. PORTLAND CEMENT: Shall be as described by ASTM C-150. Other ingredients shall be as described by American Standard Spec. for Portland Cement Plastering A42.2 and A42.3, latest edition. C. EXPOSED AGGREGATE: Shall match existing chips with 1/3 #1 chips, 1/3 #2 chips, and.1/3 #3 chips. Follow Terrazzo Association sizing of chips: i.e., No. 1 size is 1/4"; No. 2 size is approximately 3/8"; and No. 3 size is approximately 1/2" in size. D. ACCESSORIES: All plaster stops, expansion joints and metal grid materials shall be zinc alloy. 2.02 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING: A. MORTAR FOR ALL COATS: This mixture shall consist of one (1) 94 lb. sack of standard portland cement to not less than three (3) nor more than four and one-half (4-1/2) parts of damp, loose sand. Hydrated lime may be added for plasticity, not to exceed 10 lbs. per bag of portland cement. .B. Provide X-59 additive in the proportion of 3/4 lb. per sack of portland cement for all stucco work. X-59 shall be added directly to the mixer with the other ingredient in the following order: (1) Water (2) X-59 (3) Portland Cement (4) Sand X-59 is a spreading agent for portland plaster and manufactured by the Cabot Corp., 125 High St., Boston, Mass., or the Protective Coating, Inc., 2745 Lodelle St., Fort Worth, Texas. White portland cement and white silica sand or marble dust shall be used with mineral color added, to obtain the color selected by the Architect which shall match the new precast concrete panel construction and the adjacent cooling tower finish. 09230- 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER: A. Total Thickness: All portland cement plaster of this type shall be a minimum of 1" thick from back plane of metal -- lath or other metal reinforcement, or a minimum of 3/4" thick on masonry, or as indicated on the drawings. B. All plaster stops, expansion joints and metal grid materials shall be zinc alloy when used on the exterior. Expansion joint shall be a minimum of 12 feet on center horizontally and vertically. Arrange panels to eliminate all dry jointing. ^- C. Temperature: Portland cement plaster shall not be applied to surfaces that contain frost. D. First (Scratch) Coat: Surface of masonry walls or �.. cast -in -place concrete shall be thoroughly an evenly dampened, but not saturated, preceding the application of the scratch coat. The plaster mortar shall be forced tightly against the surface. 1. When the scratch coat is applied to metal lath or other metal reinforcement, it shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure so that it is shoved through the �-- metal to completely embed the reinforcement. The thickness of the scratch coat shall be approximately 3/8". Before the scratch coat hardens, it shall be ^, evenly scratched in both directions with a standard scratcher to provide a good mechanical key for the second or brown coat. 2. On surfaces not sufficiently rough to provide a good mechanical key, and where metal lath or other metal reinforcement is not specified, the first coat shall be dashed on. After dashing, the mortar shall not be �- troweled or otherwise disturbed until it is hardened. 3. Scratch coat shall be continuously moist -cured for not less than 48 hours after application. E. Second (Brown) Coat: 1. Brown coat shall be applied not sooner than 48 hours after the application of the scratch coat. Before applying the brown coat the surface of the scratch coat shall be dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction. The thickness of the brown coat shall be approximately 3/8" and shall be applied in two (2) applications or coats, one (1) immediately following the other. F. Finish Coat: Before applying finish, the surface of the brown coat shall be dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction. Finish coat shall be applied 1/4" thick when using No.2 or smaller size chips and applied 3/8" thick when using No. 3 chips. While finish coat is still workable, embed the chips by an approved gun, into the mortar. Leave �- as placed for rough texture, or use a cork float to tamp and bring the chips and finish to a level plane. Color of chips to match existing. Finish coat shall be kept continuously moist for not less than 48 hours after application. G. Cleaning: After the surface is set and dry, clean down with a masonry cleaner as recommended by the manufacturer. No strong acids shall be used for cleaning surface. 09230- 3 H. Waterproofing: After portland cement plaster has had several weeks of drying time and when the surface is completely dry, a heavy application of liquid silicone waterproofing shall be applied. End of Section. 09230- 4 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide all gypsum drywall work and materials " shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. ~ 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Unit Masonry - Section 04200 Hollow Metal Frames - Section 08100 �- Painting - Section 09900 1.04 SCHEDULE OF WORK: See finish schedules and drawings for locations of gypsum work required. The types include the following: A. Single Layer Applications: Applied over CMU construction with adhesive; use 5/8" thick, Type X. B. Single Layer Ceiling Application: 5/8" thick, Type X. C. Drywall Framing and Furring: Use 20 guage metal stud system. 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for their work to avoid cutting and patching. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable Drywall Manufacturers: U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., Flinkote Co. B. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of 3 years previous experience in comparable work. -. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Fire Hazard Classification; Local Building Code. D. Fire Endurance Ratings: 1. Partitions: 1 hour fire -rated construction, unless otherwise noted, 2 hour fire -rated partitions U.L. Design U411-2 hr. ~ 2. Ceilings: 1 hour fire -rated construction, unless otherwise noted. E. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. 1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use, in accordance with Section 01340. B. Samples: Submit samples of framing members and accessory ~ items. C. Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. 09250- 1 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to project site with manufacturer's label intact and legible. Deliver fire -rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification numbers. Store materials under cover, in dry area, off floor. Damaged, deteriorated, or wet materials shall be rejected and replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Source: Products listed are items manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. and are listed as a standard of quality. Equivalent items of listed acceptable manufacturers are acceptable. Products furnished on project shall be of a single manufacturer. B. Interior Partition: Metal Studs; USG metal studs, channel type, roll -formed from 20 ga. galvanized steel, designed for screw attachment. C. Floor and Ceiling Runners: USG metal runners formed of 20 ga. galvanized steel. D. Furring Channels: USG metal furring channel, 7/8" deep, roll formed, hat -shaped sections of 25 ga. galvanized steel. E. Gypsum Wallboards: 1. Fire -Rated Board: 5/8" thick Sheetrock Firecode Wallboard, ASTM C36, Type X, tapered edge. F. Fasteners: Provide type and size as recommended by drywall manufacturer, length.as required for each assembly. G. Drywall Adhesive: As recommended by drywall manufacturer for substrate scheduled. H. Metal Accessories: 1. Corner Beads: Dur-A-Bead No. 101, galvanized. 2. Metal Trim (Casing Bead): No. 200-A or 200-B metal trim, galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: Maintain minimum of 550F temperature in building one week prior to installation and until insulation and joint treatment is complete. Provide adequate ventilation to remove excess moisture during joint treatment. 3.02 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION: A. Metal Runners: Align accurately according to partition layouts and fasten to structure at 24" o.c. Brace top runners to structure above with bracing members 8 ft..on center, maximum. B. Metal Studs: Place in accordance with schedule below, unless otherwise noted on Drawings, into floor and ceiling runners. Secure studs to runners with screws at door and window frames, partition intersections and corners and secure remaining studs with positive attachment. 3.03 PANEL ERECTION: A. Single -Layer Wallboard - Treated Joints: Use maximum practical lengths. Apply face out with long dimension vertical. Attach with adhesive. 09250- 2 B. Ceiling Panel Erection - Single Layer: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at sight angles to framing members and fasten with screws spaced at 12" o.c. Place abutting ends or edge joints over web surface of framing members and fit neatly and accurately with end joints staggered. 3.04 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION: A. Corner Beads: Install on external corners, with suitable fasteners spaced 9" o.c. on both sides. B. Metal Trim: Install over face -layer wallboard with suitable fasteners spaced 9" o.c., where shown on Drawings and where gypsum board surfaces meet dissimilar surfaces. 3.05 CLEANING: At the completion of installation, remove rubbish from building, leaving floors broom clean. Remove excess material, scaffolding, tools, and other equipment from building and job site. 14 End of Section. 09250- 3 SECTION 09500 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide lay -in type suspended acoustical ceilings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions, Sepcial Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Existing A/C Diffusers and Grilles - As Noted On Plans Existing Light Fixtures - As Noted On Plans 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate materials and construction of systems and locate suspension grid members and show their relationship with walls, partitions, furr downs, light fixtures, grilles, and diffusers. Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of acoustical system component. B. Samples: Submit full size samples of each acoustical board and suspension system for Engineer's approval. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning each type of acoustic material. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications of Installer: Subcontract the acoustical ceiling and related work to an experienced installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustical materials,as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. B. Fire Hazard Classification: 1. Maximum Flame Spread: UL (ASTM E84): 25, Class 25 FS SS-S-118Ai 1.06 COORDINATION: Coordinate installation with other trades and make provisions for their work to prevent cutting and patching. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in factory packages with factory labels attached indicating brand, pattern, size and fire rating as applicable. Store acoustical materials at normal room temperature in a protected enclosure having a stabilized moisture content. Comply with manufacturer's storage recommendations. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. Furnish written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance. B. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, sagging, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting or loss of acoustical properties of materials. 09500- 1 1.09 EXTRA STOCK: At completion of project, furnish Owner with one full unopened carton of each type of acoustical board/tile material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Ceiling Systems: 1. Type -I: All renovated areas shown on the plans at the main level. Ceiling Panels to be mineral acoustical board conforming to FS SS-S-118B, Class A, equal to USG Acoustone Checkmate. STC: 35-44 NRS: .50-.70 Light Reflectance: .75 or more Size: 24" x 24" x 5/8", Lay -in SQ Edge Finish: Standard White Suspension System: Exposed USG Donn Meridian, 9/16" White. 2. Type 2: Corridor noted on the plans at the main level. Ceiling Panels to match existing panel removed with new. Suspension System: Match existing grid removed with new. B. Exposed Lay -In Suspension System: 1. Exposed tee grid system to be indicated for ceiling types above. Suspension to be inverted -tee type, direct hung system meeting "intermediate",or better structural standards of ASTM C635. 2. Main and cross tees (each 1-1/2" high) fabricated with double webs of .015 cold -rolled steel, electro-zinc coated and factory painted as noted above. 9/16 exposed flange, paint finish to match grid. 3. Edge molding, 0.020"steel, channel or hemmed edge angle shaped, 9/16" exposed flange, paint finish to match grid. 4. Maximum deflection: 1/360 span. 'D. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 ga., galvanized, soft -annealed, mild steel wire. E. Attachment Devices: Where hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to framing members, provide attachment devices for type of construction used in the work, with a carrying capacity not less than 5 times design loads involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. In areas to receive acoustical materials, maintain relative humidity at not more than 70% and temperature between 60°F - 750F., 24 hours before, during, and after installation. B. Examine areas for conditions that would affect quality and -. execution of work and report descrepancies. 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL: A. Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636. B. Minimum width of border tile of board allowed: one-half unit width. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM: A. Space main tees at 48" o.c., suspend from structure with 09500-2 hanger wire spaced at 48" o.c. Install additional hanger wires at 6" from ends of each suspension member and at corners of light fixtures, and other items supported by ceiling suspension system. B. Space cross tees at 24" o.c., connect to main tees. Rest main and cross tees on wall moundlings. C. Rigidly brace entire system in both directions, leave bottom surface of members flush and level. D. Install ceiling board according to manufacturer's recommendations and in level plane bearing on suspension members. Neatly cut out board around items installed by other trades. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling and wall board that is damaged, installed inproperly, or shows visible sign of sagging. Clean soiled areas of ceiling material and exposed suspension system; comply with manufacturer's instructions. Replace ceiling units and members which are damaged or cannot be cleaned. 3.05 PROTECTION: Advise Contractor and Owner of proper procedures for protection of acoustical ceilings from damage or deterioration. End of Section 0.9500-3 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: �"• A. Provide complete painting and finishing of surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, in areas of new masonry and drywall construction. B. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. C. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, lead, and lead coated copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or scheduled. -. D. Other surfaces not to be painted include precast concrete panels, marblecrete, ceiling, and floor coverings; items with factory applied final finish; chases; and plenums above suspended ceilings, except as noted otherwise. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions, Sepcial Conditions, ^ and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Unit Masonry - Section 04200 Caulking & Sealants - Section 07900 Gypsum Drywall Construction- Section 09250 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. B. Field Quality Control: Apply each type of finish required on a representative area for approval of color, texture, quality and workmanship. After approval, these applications shall serve as standard of quality for entire ^ project. 1.05 SAMPLES AND COLORS: A. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by Architect. Number of colors to be used on,job will be determined by the adjacent finish which shall be matched or as noted. B. Prepare two 12" x 12" samples of each color and sheen selected, on properly prepared paint -out cards or hardboard. Approved samples shall remain at project site. C. Submit 12" x 12" samples of drywall textures. D. Submit paint schedule in accordance with submittal requirements of Section. List each surface and its proposed paint products and systems. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Comply with provisions of Section 01600. B. Submit substitute paint schedule listing each surface and its proposed products. 09900' 1 C. Submit complete supporting data, specifications, and identifying numbers of each proposed product. D. Do not order or deliver materials until Engineer's approval is obtained. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.08 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION: A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.09 EXTRA PAINT: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1),gallon of each color of each enamel color used. 1.10 GUARANTEE: This Contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pratt and Lambert, unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pittsburgh Paints, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING: A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved. by Engineer. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer, -do not exceed thinning directions. 09900-2 2.03 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: I A. Compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and topping compound, ASTM C4475-70. B. Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM C47570. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finished for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify Engineer in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is below 50 deg. F. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before painting. D. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as balance of doors after they are fitted. Seal top, bottom, opening and hardware recesses immediately after hanging doors. E. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. F. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60°F for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. G. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. H. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. I. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: A. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil, or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. B. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson Chemical Co., Detroit, Mich. C. Fill scratches, cracks, and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. 09900- 3 D. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat. E. Touch-up shop.coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. F. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. G. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT: A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. Prefill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. Treat joints of all face layers and all gypsum board fireproofing.. 3.05 APPLICATION: A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers,as recommended my manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the Engineer. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats.. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects.- G. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by Engineer before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Engineer a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Engineer reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.06 CLEANING AND PATCHING: A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. 09900- 4 3.08 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING: EXTERIOR METAL: Noted on Plan INTERIOR METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH: Noted on Plan DRYWALL (Gypsum) CONSTRUCTION - ENEMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First Coat.: Pratt & Lambert Double Duty Primer Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite.Enamel Gloss or Eggshell A uniform coverage will be required or additional coats shall be applied. Use enamel paint where scheduled on plans. CONCRETE BLOCK - LATEX FINISH -REMODEL WORK First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flatt Wall Finish Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flatt Wall Finish End of Section. 09900- 5 SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CHECKING DOCUMENTS: A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Engineer will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions. of sheets or pages of_the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.02 GENERAL: A. In general, the.lines and ductsto be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where.exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required D. All conduits -in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations,.etc.; and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation 15000-1 a details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to: avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building', and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in .� location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to -^ the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Engineer shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Engineer before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to d,. comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Engineer before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Orden of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, ^' grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 15000-2 2. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 3. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in .a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Engineer in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the,General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.03 DIMENSIONS: A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.04 INSPECTION OF SITE: A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new 15000-3 work in the .present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.05 ELECTRICAL WIRING: A. All electric wiring, except for temperature controls, will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.06 MOTORS AND CONTROLS: A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these.specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on.the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed .., by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. r.. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 15000-4 1.08 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standgrd shall be listed by the Underwriters 'Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Engineer before proceeding- C. The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Engineer's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. ,The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.09 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL: A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list. of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. 15000-5 C. Should a substitutionbe accepted under the provisions of the -conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Engineer as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Engineer reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Engineer and any action by the Engineer in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract -^ documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at'the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction,' coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section,,properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of -any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Engineer, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 15000-6 1.11 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS: A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include -the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulines or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.12 PERMITS, FEES, ETC.: A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a building permit from the City of Lubbock for record purposes. In as much as all utilities at the site are owned by the City, there are no connection fees. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies serving the facility due to work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes or these specifications. 1.13 TESTING: A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials.necessary for making tests. 1.14 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES: A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all - local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where _these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Engineer, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 15000-7 1.15 TERMINOLOGY: A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless, specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building_ components in place. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. G. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.16 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP: A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Engineer, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the w- premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. All cutting and patching for work under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be done by the Contractor under the section for which the trade is specified. 15000-8 1.18 PAINTING: A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a general outline of the required work for Divisions 15 and 16. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up, and then given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all new exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all new exposed sheet metal to match existing. 4. Paint all new insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Size surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. 5. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.19 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.: A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.20 OWNERS OCCUPANCY: A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without ibterruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.21 SCHEDULE OF WORK: A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with the normal routine of the Owner. It must be understood that the Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities shall therefore be continued in operation with a minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with this requirement. 15000-9 1.22 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS: A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical system which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each -- bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be.relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as.directed by the Engineer. + For example: 1. Existing plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated °^ under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.23 SALVAGE MATERIALS: " A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, .� plumbing and electrical systems where.shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Engineer), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Unless noted otherwise, existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. 15000-10 Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated.by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.24 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Engineer to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Engineer for his information. 1.25 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT: A. ,The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The. Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Engineer and finally connect as directed by the Engineer. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.26 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A._ The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 15000-11 1.27 OPERATING MANUALS: A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Engineer will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 10. List of fuse sizes required for equipment. 1.28 GUARANTEE: A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined.by the Engineer, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate. 1.29 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS. - A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Engineer when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.30 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION: A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and rt- specifications. End of Section 15000-12 SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.04 INSPECTION: A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE: A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Push on Gaskets for C.I. Caulked Joints for C.I. No Hub Joints Fittings Soil Pipe Soil Pipe 15200-1 ASTM A74, ASTM C564 Fed. Spec. Type II ASTM D3183 Class SV HH-P-117 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22' Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Fed. Spec. WW-P-501E Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. -- D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style'77 2.02 VALVES: A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed body, malleable handle, square stem top; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 Globe 3" and 'smaller 1 Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Check Valves: Use "Silent" check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations. E. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring; equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36. F. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 10B or 20B up to 125 psi 11B, or 21B up to 250 psig. 15200-2 G. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. H. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. I. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Mechanical coupling valves equal to Victaulic "Vic-300" are acceptable. J. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. .Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. K. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. L. Pipe Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as manufactured by Proco Series 240. Construction shall include neoprene cover and tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate. M. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Hoffman No. 78 cast brass body (150 psig) on pipe sizes 3" and smaller; Hoffman No. 792 cast iron body (250 psig) on pipe sizes 411'and larger. Crane and Sarco acceptable. Pipe discharge to a floor drain or as directed. N. Strainers: 1. Pump Inlets: Y-pattern Muellar Steam Specialty Type 761. At Contractor's option, y-pattern Muellar Steam Specialty Type 752G with grooved ends for Mechanical couplings. Provide blowdown valves and Type 304 stainless steel screens. 2. Coil Inlet Strainers: 2-1/2" and smaller, Muellar Steam Specialty#251-DI; 250 psig, cast iron, screwed end with 20.mesh type 304 stainless steel screen. Provide blowoff valves. 3" and larger, Muellar Steam Specialty #758, 200 psig, cast iron, flanged, with 2'0. mesh type 304 stainless steel screen. Provide blowoff valves. Hoffman acceptable. 15200-3 3. Domestic Water Application: Muellar Steam Specialty #351, 200 psig, bronze, screwed end, with 20 mesh type 304 stainless steel screens. Provide blowoff valves. Hoffman acceptable. 2.03 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES: A. The Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensating flow control valves at each chilled water coil, heating water coil and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. Valves shall have the capacities indicated on the drawings. Valves shall be as manufactured by Autoflow or Griswold. B. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within plus or minus 5% accuracy over a 3# to 40# differential range. C. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained, open -chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be type 300 passivated stainless steel. No plates materials are acceptable. D. The type 300 passivated stainless steel cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring -loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. E. Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. F. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. G. All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsiblity. H. Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag to be marked with unit identification, valve model number and rated flow in GPM. I. Flow control valves serving small coils or other applications and scheduled as Autoflow FV series shall have an integral ball shutoff valve and at least one temperature and pressure test port, with screwed ends. J. Flow control valves serving large coils or other applications and scheduled as Autoflow GE series shall have two pressure/temperature test ports with extensions 15200-4 to extend through insulation. Valves shall have grooved, ends for installation with mechanical couplings. At Contractor's option, Autoflow BR series with screwed ends may be used on sizes 3" and smaller. 2.04 VENTURI FLOW MEASURING DEVICE: (SMALL COILS) A. Provide where shown on the drawings a combination ball valve/Venturi flow measuring device for use to verify flow rates of automatic flow control valves. B. The ball valve/indicator device shall have an integral 300 lb. rated shutoff stainless steel ball valve. The venturi section shall have combination pressure/temperature test ports and unions. Indicators shall be furnished with chained metal tag showing location, size, and GPM. C. Provide a Meter Kit with readout instrumentation to include a pressure gauge, thermometer, a 6" face differential pressure meter with hoses, connections and pressure taps. Provide transparent meter faces to read flow directly in GPM for all valve sizes. The entire kit shall be contained in a single carrying case. D. The ball valve/indicator device shall be as manufactured by Flowset or approved equal. 2.05 FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: (LARGE COILS, SYSTEM PIPING) A. Furnish and install Venturis as shown on drawings. B. Venturis shall have a maximum pressure drop of .8 ft. Venturis 1-1/4" thru 2" brass screwed, 2-1/211 and over for butt welding to piping. Nipples, valves and disconnects to be included with each venturi. C. Venturis shall be Gerand, Barco or Robertson with compatible meter. D. Each flow measuring device shall be furnished with a permanent meter equal to Annubar Eagle Eye. Meters shall read directly in GPM. Each mechanical room shall have a 14 gauge surface mounted enclosure in which the flow meters in that space shall be flush mounted in the door. The door shall be hinged and lockable. Tubing within the enclosure shall be polyethylene and shall be neatly fastened along the hinge side and protected against abrasion. Each meter shall be identified by engraved formica nameplates (white letters on black background) under each meter. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. E. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. F. Provide one portable Eagle Eye model 77C flow meter in a portable case, including tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" scale with dampener, zero adjustment, bleed valves, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.50 of flow. 15200-5 2.06 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.07 THERMOMETER WELLS: A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. 2.08 TEST WELLS: A. Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 2.09 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS: A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. 15200-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees,'and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES: A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, 15200-7 floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.03 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male -^ threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean ,., insides of fittings and outsides .of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings on hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder for all copper tubing, 95% tin, 5% antimony. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler .,, material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal Specification AA-1-666C Grade 11. Couplings gasket shall be equal to Victaulic Grade"H" molded synthetic rubber, per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts, per ASTM-A-183-60. -" E. All pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-66C Grade 11. Where malleable fitting - pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved or rolled ends may be used. 15200-8 F. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with coupling manufacturer's recommended lubricant to facilitate installation. G. Pipe grooving or rolling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. H. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at.a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in making up the joint. 3.04 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS: A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.05 REPAIR OF LEAKS: A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.08 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES: A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. End of Section 15200-9 SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications requires the ^^ furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Piping shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 211. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. E. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings. F. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. 2.02 DRAINS: A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. B. All floor drains shall have deep seal p-trap. Floor Drain FD'A' Fixture Wade No. W-1104-STDB with flange, integral clamping collar, cast iron body, nickel bronze strainer. 15210-1 Floor Drain FD'BI Fixture Wade No. W-1744 with square cast iron hinged top, cast iron body, sediment bucket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. B., Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. C. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed. D. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. E. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. 3.02 TESTING: A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. End of Section 15210-2 SECTION 15230 - CHILLED WATER 'SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, °-° materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled water systems as shown on=the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Chilled Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Piping larger than 2" shall be assembled by mechanical couplings. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper assembled with wrought ^ copper solder joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION ,-. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. ^ Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of ^ the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system which may be isolated with the valves shown or .., required. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Drains are required for sections of circulating systems which may be isolated with the valves shown or required. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. 15230-1 D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. E. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connection at a low point in the chiller room to drain the system. 3.02 CLEANING: A. Fill the new piping system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.03 TESTING: A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all new piping. -Test all lines at 1500 of the system working pressure or.100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall furnish the initial chemical treatment. Provide a water chemical analysis report to the Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End of Section 15230-2 SECTION'15235 - HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include .drain lines where shown or required. "^ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Piping larger than 2" shall be assembled by mechanical couplings. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. .PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of ~- the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating "-" systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. D. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connecting at a low point in the boiler room to drain the system. 15235-1 3.02 CLEANING: A. The entire heating water system shall be thoroughly cleaned. Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three -pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air, heat to operating temperature, and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.03 TESTING: A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End of Section 15235-2 SECTION 15250.- CONDENSING WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: ^- A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the condensing water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install condensing water circulating piping complete and connect to tower, condenser, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. B. Condensing Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Ilse mechanical couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using 150 lb. malleable iron banded fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper tubing assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps, with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B.� Install drains from the cooling tower pan to the nearest drain in each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. C. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating. systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. D. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connections in the chiller room to drain the system. 15250-1 3.02 CLEANING: A. Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.03 TESTING: A. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End.of Section 15250-2 SECTION 15290 - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: ^ A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.04 REFERENCES: A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.05 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION: A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. The entire exposed length of any new piping system shall ^ be painted white before application of any identification. C. In addition, the existing condensing water supply and condensing water return piping in the chiller room and boiler room shall be painted white and properly marked. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet.. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that -no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly sized. 15290-1 E. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 1.06 IDENTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Each valve shall be numbered with the suffix '-90' so as not to conflict with any existing identification. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. 1.07 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the'same number as shown on the drawings. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Nameplates shall be secured with stainless steel screws. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 15290-2 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. New AC Units 5. New Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 6. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 7. Cooling Towers End of Section 15290-3 SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL DUCTWORK: A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all,sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. 15320-1 E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. F. Transverse duct joints 36" and larger shall be made with The Ductmate System or an approved equal. The-Ductmate .System components shall be of standard catalogue manufacture as supplied by Ductmate Industries, Inc. G. The installation of The Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturers printed instruction and installation manuals. H. The standard Ductmate 35 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate 25 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "F" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc., shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. �- 2.02 DUCT LINER: A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance. with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away 'from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.03 DUCT SEALER: A. All supply air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the -- exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. 15320-2 B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. 2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES: A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed ,of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 2411, volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to 15320-3 permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. �.. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS: A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National ' Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Proviae access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be 1-1/2 hour rated unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. 2.07 0 ACCESS PANEL: A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels.are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. At the Contractor's option, he may use "Sandwich" frameless access door as manufactured by Ductmate. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. C. Each door providing access to fire dampers or smoke damper shall have a label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading "FIRE DAMPER". 15320-4 2.08 LOUVERS - FZXED: A. Provide louvers as shown and scheduled on the drawings. Provide with galvanized blades and frames to fit wall construction. Provide with inside insect screen on exhaust louvers and birdscreen on intake louvers. Units shall be factory finished. B. Dimensions shown are nominal. Coordinate exact dimensions with the general construction. End of Section 15320-5 SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and .- General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND'MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 -. Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe'Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All .295 or 291 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Adjuster All 2381 2.02 HANGER RODS: A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 411 through 611 ^ 5/ 8 11 511 through 811 811 through 1011 3/4" .10" and larger 12" and larger 15330-1 2.03 HANGER SPACING: A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced. Where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or requried by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 211- and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 1010" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117' expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes 15330-2 P- _, not exceeding 1/211 and for loads of 200 lbs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. I. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation on horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all " pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the w- bottom half of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type fully encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end. 3.02 DUCT HANGERS: '- A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. 3.03 FOUNDATIONS FOR MACHINERY: A. Concrete subbases not less than 4" high unless indicated otherwise, shall be provided for all floor mounted mechanical and electrical equipment. Subbases shall rest on structural floor. B. Electric motor shall be mounted on the same foundation as the driven machine. Piping connections at pumps shall be supported on the same foundation as the pumps. C. Foundation for machines shall be a minimum of 3000 psi ... concrete with all exposed surfaces steel troweled smooth, reinforced with 6 x 6 No. 3 mesh. Chamfer corners of all foundations. D. Machines shall be secured to bases with anchor bolts of '- ample size. All machine having bedplates and motors shall be grouted under the full area of the bedplates with a nonshrinking, premixed grout. After grout has set, all wedges, shims, and jack bolts shall be removed and the spaces filled with grout. 15330-3 3.04 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS: A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A-36. All steel shall be new, clean and straight. B. All holes shall be drilled or punched for the proper size. Burning of holes with a torch is not permitted. C. Clean all surfaces of steel of mill scale, rust and other foreign matter and prime with at least one shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate. D. Fabricate and erect all structural steel supports, anchors and guides in accordance with the drawings to support any large chilled water, steam, condensate and other piping. E. All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of Division 5. F. Concrete anchor bolts for supporting structural steel members shall be Molly Parabolt or equal and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Minimum imbedment and minimum spacing requirements must be met. Concrete holes for the bolts shall be cored through the concrete and the embedded reinforcing steel. Voids between concrete anchor bolts and structural members shall be filled by welding to fill the void. End of Section 15330-4 SECTION 15335 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of �^ the specifications shall furnish and install all vibration isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 ISOLATION: A. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and �-- structure borne noise to building structure or spaces. B. All rotating equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The equipment supporting structure shall not have any natural frequencies within plus or minus 30% of the operating speeds. The equipment when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a self excited vibration velocity of 0.101 per second when measured with a vibration meter on the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at the equipment mounting feet if the bearings are concealed. C. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any traverse and eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely affect the equipment or attachments. D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of equipment. �^ E. Isolation -shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and deflection even if equipment weight is not evenly distributed. F. Spring Isolators: Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable without any housing, and complete with neoprene acoustical friction pads, a minimum of 1/4" thick between the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment or base. Coil outside diameters shall not be less than 0.8 of the operating height of the spring. Spring shall have an additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the operating 15335-1 deflection. The horizontal stiffness of spring isolators shall be not less than 0.8 of the vertical axial stiffness. All spring isolators shall be selected for initial deflection or more. Isolators for air units shall be selected for 2" deflection. Isolators shall galvanized where installed outside. G. Suspension Type Isolation: Suspension type spring isolation for piping system or equipment hangers shall a combination of spring and neoprene in series. The spring and elastomer combination shall be encased in a structurally stable steel bracket. Spring diameters shall be large enough to permit a 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod connecting the hanger to the equipment or pipe without rubbing on the hanger box. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1" be be 3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPES: A. Furnish vibration isolation in accordance with the following: 1. Each pipe connected to equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a minimum of 3 spring hangers. 2. Hanger vibration isolators shall be selected for not less than the deflection provided for the equipment to which the piping is connected. The vibration isolator units selected shall accommodate the thermal movement of the piping systems. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION: EQUIPMENT Rooftop Air Units Chiller Blower Coil Units Air Compressors PRIMARY ISOLATION Internal Isolators Neoprene Pads Spring Isolators - 2" Neoprene Isolator End of Section 15335-2 SECTION 15400 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under .other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein.. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS: A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame -- resistant white draft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. 15400-1 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION: A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Engineer. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams with a double tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system. If a single tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system is used, an additional layer of Benjamin Foster 82-07 vapor barrier lap adhesive must be used. Tightly butt the ends of the pipe covering and apply the 4" wide butt strips.as.provided by the insulation manufacturer. C. Provide a separate, additional, field applied 8 oz. canvas cloth cover on all portions of any insulated piping system exposed in any space, including equipment room, and in any room in the building. Exercise care to locate seams in the cloth in an inconspicuous place and apply all cloth neatly, including that on valves and fittings. Adhere the cloth in all cases with adhesive. Jackets shall be applied wrinkle free and smooth. 3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS: A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing,insulation where new connections are made. 15400-2 C. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. D. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory ,-, applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. E. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines except in the Cooling Tower Equipment Rooms, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass ,., insulation. Vapor seal all insulation. F.. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with an All Service. jacket (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston"PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. G. Boiler Breeching and Flues: 2" thick, Owens-Corning -- "Kaylo-10" molded pipe covering or blocks, wired in place. Fill all cracks and voids with insulating cement. Finish with glass cloth to match existing. H. Chiller: Factory insulated. I. Boiler: Factory Insulated. J. Equipment Room Insulation: The air compressor equipment room shall be acoustically treated. Owens-Corning "Type °^ 700 Series Type 705" 6 lb. density, 2" thick, fiberglass board. Install over 100% of the ceiling. Adhere to the wall and ceiling with 50% coverage of Benjamin Foster .-. 85-15 and impale on stik-clips glued to the wall or ceiling with speed clips 18" on centers. Clip off excess stik clip flush with liner. K. The final appearance of the acoustical treatment shall be neat and smooth. The bottom edge of the board shall have a formed metal channel secured to the wall to prevent exposure of the edge. Neatly core all penetrations for hanger, pipes, etc. No loose edges or torn insulation is permitted. L. Rectangular Air Duct (Exterior): Insulate rectangular ._, supply and return air ducts with 1 1/2" thick, unfaced Manville "Spinglas No.81411, 3 lb. density fiberglas, applied with 100% adhesive coverage and graham pins 12" OCEW. Apply with corner bead and cover with glass cloth jacket. Seal with exterior grade sealant equal to Childers CP-10. End of Section 15400-3 SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6_ Quantity PART 2 - - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS:. A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as 15500-1 specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree,C ambient, 'dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. C. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally -- enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.02 STARTERS: A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. 2.03 COOLING TOWER, CERAMIC TYPE: A. Furnish and install all material, equipment and appurtenances, complete erection labor, as well as any expenses required for the manufacturer, transportation, delivery, erection, testing and adjustment of a complete counterflow induced draft cooling tower. This cooling tower shall include fill, hardware, drift eliminators, fan assemblies, speed reducers, fan drives, water distribution system, fiberglass membrane on all walls and all other materials and parts required to make this cooling tower complete. A reinforced concrete basin, internal structural members and wall sections matching the companion building and including the required coping and copper flashing under coping are specified under another section of these specifications. B. The cooling tower shall be a fireproof permanent type cooling tower having aesthetics and life expectancy in,, keeping with total project concept, and full thermal efficiency throughout its life. There shall be no free water carryover out the fan stack to cause spotting of surroundings and automobiles. C. The cooling tower furnished shall be a regularly cataloged product of a cooling tower manufacturer who; has produced towers which.have seen at least ten (10) years satisfactory service using the manufacture and type of fill material and other components proposed for this project. Under no conditions will wood, plastic, cement asbestos or asbestos metal fill components be considered. 15500-2 D. Each cooling tower cell shall cool the scheduled GPM of water from 95 degrees F. to 85 degrees F. when operating at an inlet wet bulb of 76 degrees F. and shall be from the line of towers produced by the tower manufacturer which has been certified by the Cooling Tower Institute in accordance with the CTI Bulletin STD-201; or in the event the tower is not certified by the Cooling Tower Institute, one (1) cell shall be tested upon completion, when there is adequate heat load available, in accordance with the Cooling Tower Institute's Acceptance Test Procedure, CTI Bulletin ATC-105 in the presence of a Cooling Tower Institute test observer. E. In the case of the acceptance test, if the tower does not meet design specifications, necessary alternations to the tower to produce the design specifications shall be made, and the tower retested in accoreance with the foregoing to verify same to the satisfaction of the Engineer. F. Upon completion, issue a written guarantee duly signed covering the following components and should any of these components fail during the specified time, they shall be .replaced. The guarantee shall cover the following components: 1. Manufacturer shall guarantee against unserviceability the fill and fill supports for a period of twenty five years. 2. Remaining internal components shall carry the manufacturer's standard one year guarantee. G. The cooling tower shall be constructed where indicated on the drawings. The dimensions of the individual cells shall not exceed those indicated on the contract drawings. The cooling tower manufacturer shall take these space limitations into consideration for the various designs required, including water cooling capacity and performance, fan air handling and motor brake horsepower requirements: H. The following components shall be furnished with the cooling tower and installed: 1. Cast Iron Lintels: The cast iron tee section lintels supporting the tile fill shall conform to ASTM Specification A48-26, Class 25 for gray iron castings designed with a safety factor of three, plus 1/8 inch of additional thickness for corrosion. 2. Tile Fill: The tile fill shall be of multi -cell design, set without mortar, in a patter, and of sufficient height to meet the performance specifications. The tile shall be dense and vitreous, with a water absorption such that it will pass a freze-thaw test conducted in accordance wth ASTM C67-73. The tile shall have a minimum crushing strength of 400 psig over the gross area of the tile when the load is applied parallel to the cells, as tested in accordance with ASTM C67-73. 15500-3 3. Mist Eliminators: The eliminators shall be of the three -pass zigzag type, assembled into sections, making a strong stable unit. Free water carryng over shall not exceed .05 of 1 percent of the water flow. These sections shall be supported on PVC tee sections. The tee sections shall be suspended with 1/4 inch brass rods connected to stainless steel -. clips embedded in the bottom side of the roof deck at the time of casting. 4. A stainless steel access door shall be provided for passage through the eliminators. 5. Eliminator parts shall be profile extrusions of polyvinyl chloride resin. The resin shall conform to ASTM D-1874-75 Type I Grade 2. The PVC eliminators and supporting framework shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. 6. Speed Reducers: The speed reducer gears shall be rated in accordance with practices of the American Gear Manufacturers Association, using serving factor of two for cooling tower services. Gear reducers shall be of the spiral bevel, single reduction type. The gear reducer shall be bolted and pinned on a galvanized steel base plate and grouted to structure. 7. An oil level sightglass, fill/drain line and vent line shall be installed outside the fan stack. 8. Fan Assemblies: The complete fan assembly (fan and mounting) shall be designed to give maximum fan efficiency and long life when handling saturated air at high velocities. Fan shall be of multi -blade design. The fan blades shall be fiberglass reinforced epoxy. The fan hub shall be made of cast iron with -adequate surface protection against corrosion. 9. Drive Shafts: To be of the full floating type with flexible couplings at both ends. Drive shafts shall be of all stainless steel, fitted each end with Thomas flexible couplings (stainless steel plate type). Each drive shaft shall be provided with a galvanized steel guard. 10. Motors: Motors shall be NEMA approved and shall be •^ of the TEFC type. The motor horsepower shall be of the next larger standard motor than that calculated as required for the individual fan brake horsepower, and shall be three phase, ingle winding continuous duty type wound for the scheduled voltage with normal starting torque. Motor horsepower shall be as scheduled. 11. A vibration switch shall be installed to protect mechanical equipment against excessive damage due to malfunction of rotating equipment. Switch shall be 115 VAC with remote reset. 15500-4 12. Distribution System: The distribution system for each cell shall consist of a centrally located header complete with junction boxes and side laterals, fittings and nozzles. All piping shall be either cast iron, ductile iron or Schedule 80 CPVC, depending on size. Nozzles shall be brass. Bolts shall be cadmium plated. Supply piping up to spray tree shall be fiberglass. 13. All basin piping make-up, overflow and drains, and suction lines shall be provided. 14. The above components are to be arranged as shown on the drawings, and shall be installed in such a manner as to provide a leakproof seal between the piping and the basin wall. 15. Fan Deck: The fan deck shall be constructed of reinforced light -weight concrete, precast in two (2) sections per cell, forming a complete vibration -free basin for mounting the fan, speed reducer, drive shaft and motor. 16. Exhaust Fan Stacks: The exhaust fan stacks shall be constructed of concrete. The stacks shall be contained with galvanized steel bands. 17. Sump Heater: Electrical resisting horizontal immersion heater for over -the -side mounting. Heater shall be weatherproof and shall be furnished with sludge legs for mounting in sump. Furnish with contactor, low water cut-off, and thermostat. Heater shall be sized for -10 degrees F. ambient temperature. Heater shall be equal to Indeeco Model No. 743N215, 7.5 KW per cell. 18. Start-up: A factory authorized technician shall check out the tower and place it in operation. 19. The cooling tower shall be as manufactured by Ceramic Cooling Tower Company. 2.04 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER: A. The centrifugal water chillers for both Bid Item #1 and Bid Item #2 will be pre -purchased by the Owner. B. This contractor shall take delivery of the chillers and install them complete as shown on the drawings and specified herein. C. The chiller manufacturer will be responsible for start-up and warranty of the chiller. 2.05 WATER -TUBE BOILER: A. General Description: 1. Furnish where shown on the plans one water -tube boiler. Each boiler shall be complete with all components, accessories, and appurtenances as hereinafter specified. Boilers shall be as manufactured by Superior, Bryan or approved equal. 15500-5 ,., The capacity of each unit at normal rating shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Both design and construction shall be in accordancewith A.S.M.E. Code requirements for a design pressure of 150 PSIG. " 2. Each packaged boiler shall be A.S.M.E. stamped and must also conform to all state and local codes and ordinances. In addition, a Certificate of Hartford �. Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Company shall be furnished with each unit. .3. Each unit shall be furnished as a packaged water boiler, consisting of boiler, burner, forced draft '-' fan, controls, and accessories. Each unit shall be furnished with required wiring and piping, and factory -assembled on a structural steel base as a self-contained unit: B. Boiler Design: 1. Boiler shall be of the bent tube watertube type with a tangent waterwall tube furnace. 2. The fireside of the boiler shall have longitudinal gas passes separated with waterwall tubes to ensure maximum linear gas travel. 3. All tubes shall be exposed to radiant heat in the boiler furnace to provide proper thermal water flow rates at all loads. •� 4. All boiler tubes shall be 1-1/2" diameter and be easily removable and replaceable with standard tools without requiring expanding or welding at the attachment to the drums. 5. Boiler shall have.a large downcover at the rear outside the flue gas section to provide natural circulation without being dependent on external PUMPS. 6. Boiler shall have a vent connection at the highest point on the upper drum and one inspection opening in each drum end. 7. The boiler combustion chamber floor and ends shall be constructed with.ceramic fiberboard insulation and high temperature castable refractory. 8. The boiler inner casing shall be fabricated of 11-gauge steel and 2"-thick 1,900 degree F. insulation. The casing shall be constructed with -� bolts and gaskets to ensure that the products of combustion are contained within the boiler. 9. The boiler outer casing shall consist of 3/4"-thick fiberglass insulation enclosed in 18-gauge steel panels. The outer casing shall be removable sections finished with hard baked enamel paint. 10. The boiler shall have access panels to the furnace with an observation port at the rear and to the flue gas passages at the front. A front flame observation port shall be provided at burner enclosure. 15500-6 11. The entire inner casing and combustion chamber access door shall be easily removed and replaced for inspection and maintenance. 12. Tube removal and replacement shall be readily accomplished from sides of boiler. 13. Round flanged smoke outlet to be located at top of boiler with top outlet position. 14. Lifting lugs shall be provided to facilitate installation. C. Boiler Trim: 1. Safety valves, size and quantity, shall be in strict accordance with A.S.M.,E. Code requirements. 2. Primary low water cutoff of the probe type shall be mounted and wired on the boiler at the factory. D. Burner Equipment: 1. The burner shall be capable of burning natural gas. 2. The burner shall be arranged to operate automatically with full modulation and proven.low fire start. 3. The burner shall be equipped with an integral forced draft fan of the centrifugal type, with a direct -connected motor. 4. The burner shall be equipped with gas -electric ignition. The ignition system shall be factory -mounted and consist of gas pilot, burner, ignition transformer, pilot gas regulator and pilot gas solenoid valve and pilot gas shutoff cock. 5. Main gas train, complete with two (2) motorized gas valves, gas metering valve, gas pressure regulator, two (2) lubricated gas cocks, high and low gas pressure interlocks, and proof -of -closure switch. 6. The packaged boiler shall be equipped with full complement of controls, including dual fuel shutoff valves and pressure controls and programmable combustion control. E. Controls: 1. Each unit shall be equipped with necessary controls and safety devices to operate automatically. The combustion safety control shall be of electronic type with positive, timed programming sequences, and with safety lockout control in the event of a flame failure. Safety lockout shall require manual reset before automatic recycling can continue. 2. The burner control cabinet shall be mounted on the boiler and shall contain the necessary fuses, motor contactor or magnetic motor circuit transformer. The control cabinet shall also contain the electronic flame safeguard and programmer, control circuit -switch, necessary switching relays and indicating lights, all wired to a numbered terminal strip. 3. All electronic equipment, wiring devices, and operating sequences shall be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories. 15500-7 ^ 4. Power voltage shall be 460 volts, 3-phase, .60 Hertz. Control voltage shall be 115 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hertz. 5. Operating high limit. 6. Safety high limit. 7. Modulating high limit. 8. Low water probe cutoff. �., F. Tests: 1. Boiler inspection shall include hydrostatic test. A data report shall be delivered with the boiler as evidence of A.S.M.E. compliance. The boiler shall bear an A.S.M.E. symbol. 2. A factory fire test shall be performed and performance data shall be rendered on the complete -^ unit with specified fuel prior to shipment. An operation check shall be evidenced on adjustment of controls, check of all safety devices, recording of stack temperature and analysis of flue gases. G. Efficiency: 1. Each packaged boiler shall be adjusted at the factory to operate at a minimum efficiency of 83% at all firing rates. 2. The flue gas exit temperatures shall not fall below the dew point of the flue gases to prevent condensation corrosion within the boiler. H. Warranties: 1. Each packaged boiler shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and material for.a period of twelve (12) months from date of substantial completion. All defective items shall be replaced with no charge for the one (1)-year period. ^ 2. The boiler pressure vessel shall be warranted against thermal stress cracking for a period of ten (10) years from the date of shipment providing the boiler �. is operated and maintained in accordance with the conditions specified in the Owner's Manual. The warranty shall cover the boiler pressure vessel under all operating conditions and include temperature differentials between inlet water temperature and outlet water temperature up to 150 degree F. This warranty'shall cover in full all leaks in headers and ^ downcomers caused by any conditions other than corrosion. I. Start-up and Service: 1. Start-up and service of each packaged boiler.shall be provided by factory -trained technicians in the direct employ of the manufacturer's local authorized representative. !' 2. Provision shall be made for the start-up of each packaged boiler, as well as a two-hour instruction period to owner's personnel concerning operation and maintenance. 15500-8 2.06 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS: A. Pumps shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Each shall be of the type, rotational speed, and have the flow rate and characteristics listed. The name and model number listed for each pump establishes a standard which the pump furnished must equal to exceed. B. Acceptable makers of scheduled pumps are Allis-Chalmeres, Buffalo, Weinman, Peerless, Aurora, Paco, Bell and Gossett. C. Pumps casings and glands shall be suitable for operation under 150 psig static heads. D. Rotational speeds shall not exceed those scheduled. Under no circumstances shall a pump be offered with an impeller radius greater than 90% of the distance from the shaft centerline to the cutoff in the casing. E. The head capacities are listed for bidding purposes only. The Contractor shall carefully calculate the head of each pump, taking into consideration the pressure drops in all equipment, exact lengths of pipe, valves, fittings, etc. These calculations shall take into account actual routing of the piping and all other factors that would determine the actual pumping head of each system, and shall form the basis of final pump selection.. F. Motors shall be constant speed, drip proof motors, and shall be so sized with relation to the pump impeller that the required brake horsepower will not exceed the rated motor horsepower at any point on the pump curve. Motors shall be suitable for operation with variable frequency drives. Copies of manufacturer's performance curve shall be submitted as shop drawings on each pump. Each curve shall be clearly marked to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the selection point. All pump motors shall have 1.15 service factor. G. All pumps shall have gauge tappings. H. Pumps baseplates shall be of cast iron or welded. structural steel shapes, and shall have a raised lip and threaded drain connecton. Each baseplate on a pump handling chilled water shall be of sufficient size to extend under and catch the drip from connecting flanges and the outboard bearing. I. All pumps shall be factory enameled. J. Horizontal Split Case Pump: Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing with double suction dynamically balanced bronze impeller, horizontal split case with flanged inlet and outlet. The shaft shall be carbon steel with bronze sleeves. Ball bearings shall be 250,000 hour average life, grease lubricated with slinger. The outboard bearing shall be double row thrust ball bearing. Wearing rings shall be bronze. Provide with mechanical seals. The flexible coupling shall be of the elastomer type with guard. Provide extended cast iron base with drain connection. 15500-9 K. Vertical Split Case Pump: At the contractors option, and upon approval by Engineer, vertical split case pumps as manufactured by ITT Bell and Gossett may be substituted. The contractor shall verify that pumps will fit in alloted floor space. Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing with double suction dynamically balanced bronze impeller, vertical split case with flanged inlet -- and outlet. The shaft shall be carbon steel with bronze sleeves. Ball bearings shall be 250,000 hour average life, grease lubricated with slinger. The outboard bearing shall be double row thrust ball bearing. Wearing rings shall be bronze. Provide with mechanical seals. The flexible coupling shall be of the elastomer type with guard. Provide extended cast iron base with drain connection. 2.07 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR DRIVES: ..- A. Each variable speed AC drive shall consist of an adjustable frequency controller to produce a 3 phase output capable of driving a standard NEMA or IEC design AC induction motor. B. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert 460 volt, +/- 10% 60 Hertz, 3 phase power, to an adjustable frequency 1.5 to 60 Hertz output for speed control of 10% to 100% of base speed. The adjustable frequency control shall be designed exclusively for and give efficient operation of a variable torque load. �., C. The adjustable frequency drive (AFD), shall comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system. Line noise created shall be no greater than 3% harmonic distortion. D. The AFD shall produce adjustable frequency, adjustable voltage output. The drive shall convert the AC utility power to a fixed voltage DC through the use of a full - wave diode bridge. This shall provide a power factor of 0.95 throughout the speed range. The use of isolation transformers, line reactors, or other suppression equipment is not allowed. The AFD shall then convert the fixed voltage DC to an adjustable level of DC. The AFD shall then convert the adjustable level of DC into a six step adjustable frequency and voltage fan speed controller. E. The AFD shall include the following protective features: 1. Protection against input transient voltage spikes, input power under voltage, over voltage, phase loss, output current overload, overcurrent, enclosure over. temperature. 2. DC bus discharge circuit. 3. Any disconnect switches between the AFD and the motor shall include the auxillary contact interlocked to the AFD fault trip circuit. In the event that a disconnect switch is opened while the drive is 15500-10 running, the drive shall shut down. The AFD shall include an adjustable time delay to prevent the AFD from starting into a rotating motor when the disconnect switch is closed. F. The drive shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. G. As a minimum the drive shall have the following features: 1. Drive input disconnect, door interlocked and pad -lockable. 2. Auto restart after voltage,interruption 3. HOA switch 4. Remote output contacts to indicate run mode, fault mode. 5. Isolated signal follower for 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc. 6. Percent speed and percent load indication. 7. Speed adjustment, minimum and maximum. 8. Auto/manual selector switch. 9. Manual speed potentiometer. H. The drive shall have, as a.minimum, the following indicators. 1. Overvoltage 2. Undervoltage 3. Overcurrent 4. Overload 5. Run 6. Fault 7. Auto/Manual 8. Power on pilot light I. AFD's serving the cooling tower fans shall include a manual bypass in the AFD enclosure. 1. Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the AFC to the power line, or from the lne to the controller while the motor. is at zero speed. The bypass circuitry shall be mounted in a separate section of the aFC enclosure. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. One contactor is to be between the, controller and the motor. The other contactor is to be between the bypass power line and the motor providing across -the -line starting. Motor overload protection is to be provided in both the controller mode and the bypass mode. The bypass section door shall include a switch to transfer motor operation from drive to line or line to drive, and a pilot light to indicate whether motor is operating in drive or line mode. The bypass circuitry shall.include a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker to provide a means of disconnecting all power to both the bypass circuitry 15500-11 and the controller. The disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be door interlocked and padlockable. The fuses or circuit breaker shall be sized to provide short circuit protection for the motor when in the bypass mode per.the NEC. 2. A second disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided to disconnect input power to the controller but not the bypass circuitry. This disconnect will allow troubleshooting and testing of the AFC, both energized and de -energized while operating in the bypass mode. J. The AFD shall be burned in by the manufacturer to minimize premature failures at the jobsite. The AFD shall operate a dynamometor at full load and the load and speed shall be cycled during the test. All optional and special features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation. K. The AFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from the date of substantial. completion. The warranty shall include.parts, labor, travel costs and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service. L. The manufacturer shall provide start up service in the. form of a factory trained service technicians. The -. service technician shall verify correct installation, start up the drive, and check for proper operation. M. The manufacturer shall provide an authorized factory representative to give the owner's personnel a four hour training session for the AFDs. N. Drives shall be manufactured by Graham, ABB, or IDM. 2.08 SECONDARY CHILLED WATER LOOP SYSTEM: A. General: 1. The secondary loop system shall be a variable speed .., system. The pumping system shall include, as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable frequency drive for each pump motor, remote sensors, motors,and pumps. - 2. The pump manufacturer shall take "Unit Responsibility" for the successful operation of the system supplied by him. 3. The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall havea minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems. 4. The system consists of a variable speed pump sized to meet system duty condition as indicated on the pump schedule, adjustable frequency drives, a pump logic controller, and differential pressure sensors. 5. At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system profile analysis which shall include as a minimum: the pumps performance (variable speed pump curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve) . 15500-12 6. This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt/hour draw. 7. The programmable pump controller, and adjustable frequency drives shall be supplied as separate components. All functions of the components shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. Power wiring to the motors and interlock wiring shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. Wiring from the sensors to the programmable controller shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. A complete wiring diagram shall be supplied at time of shipment that shows all field connections. B. Programmable Pump Logic Controller: 1. The controller shall be equal to ITT Bell and Gossett Technologic 2000 pump logic controller. The operator interface shall be flush mounted in the door of the packaged pumping system control cubicle. 2. The manufacturer shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable solid state variable speed pump controller. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including: motor overload, pump flow surges, NPSHR above NPSDHA, and hunting. 3. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its firmware in EPROM. On-line field modified data entries, such as set point, shall be stored in RAM memory. EPROM memory storage shall prevent accidental loss of memory due to voltage surge or spike. RAM memory shall be backed up by standard "D" cell batteries with low battery indication. In event of a catastrophic failure, all factory preset values shall be stored and shall be able to be recalled by the operator. 4. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to eight differential input analog signals and comparing them to their individual set points. It will then select the new analog that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. This system will use three differential inputs. 5. The analog input signal shall be the feedback and the set point(s) shall be the command. The closed loop hydraulic stabilization function must have the capability of performing the traditional proportional, integral and derivative modes. The proportional function shall have a range and be infinitely programmable within that range. Rates shall be in percent gain. The integral function 15500-13 shall also be infinitely programmable and compatible with the adjustable frequency drives (AFD) and the hydraulic system. It shall be entered as repeats/minute. Derivative shall be entered in units of seconds within a fully programmable range allowing infinite entries within that range. 6. The scan and compare rate that selects proper set - point and process signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum operation. 7. The pump controller shall have off line and on line diagnostic software. Off line diagnostics shall consist of CPU, EPROM, and RAM memory test. It shall have self calibration of all analog inputs with diagnostics, display test, program test, and all I/O tested and status of above displayed. 8. On line diagnostics include off line diagnostics and .operational diagnostics including but not limited to _., pump fault(s), AFD fault(s), overloads and sensor/transmitter fault(s). 9. Further fault information may be accessed by interrogating the controller through the front mounted keypad. Exact pinpointing of a fault to a specific module shall be possible. In case of failure, the controller shall fail in a -. pre -determined safe operating mode. Reset after failure shall not result in a no -flow condition unless all equipment fails. 10. The controller shall be powered by 115V/1/60Hz. The incoming power and I/O circuitry shall reject electromagnetic (EMI) and radio frequency (RFI) interference. All digital inputs shall be opto-isolated. All outputs shall be electrically isolated. All inputs and outputs shall be modular and may be replaced without re -wiring or soldering. All external sensor/transmitter furnished by the manufacturer shall be powered by the pump controller through an industrial quality 24 volt power supply. 12. Failure of any pump, motor, or drive in the system shall cause the.controller to not only display the fault condition, but alternate or transfer operation to another operating unit. -a 13. The pump logic controller shall have loop alarms for all analog inputs. Failure of any remote transmitter shall remove that transmitter signal from the remaining control functions, in random order, and display this occurrence. 14. The controller shall command the adjustable frequency drive to accelerate the pump to a point where it satisfies the programmed set point. Speed will remain constant until the set point is no longer satisfied. 15500-14 C. 15. In the event of failure due to a malfunction of the AFD it shall be turned off and the stand-by pump shall be automatically started through its AFD it shall be protected and controlled by the same pump controller. 16. A total of 33 analog and digital input/output shall be furnished. All input shall be overcurrent protected. All digital outputs shall be individually fused. Analog outputs shall be inherently short circuit protected. 17. Pump, AFD, and overload trip faults shall not clear automatically. They must be manually reset after correction of the fault. Turning off the control power shall not reset faults. All above faults shall be displayed before starting. First faults will always be displayed. Faults will not trigger erroneous fault messages. 18. The pump controller shall be self prompting. It shall display all messages in plain English. The messages shall include, but not be limited to; how to obtain default values, when to turn it on, and if it is in the active remote control mode. 19. The read-out shall be bright vacuum fluorescent capable of displaying any set point value, input or output signals, and alarm function in engineering units. 20. The pump logic controller shall be capable of operating in automatic, manual or off -Line diagnostics modes. 21. Keylock and software security shall be provided for protection of field programs and set points. Sensor/Transmitters: 1. Provide and install three complete, self-contained, strain gauge type differential pressure transmitters equal to a B & G ST-102 DP. The transmitters shall be located where indicated on the drawings. Wiring terminals and electronics shall be in separate I ompartments, so the electronics remain sealed during installation. Reverse polarity protection shall be included to keep wiring mishaps from damaging the transmitter. The 4-20mA DC signal shall be transmitted over a pair of No. 18 gauge shielded cable (supplied and installed by controls contractor). 2. Design range shall be as required by system. External zero and space adjustments, over -pressure to 2000 PSI, and no humidity effects. 3. Minimum accuracy shall be +/- 0.25% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Stability shall be +/- 0.25% of upper range limit for six months. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the transmitters. 15500-15 �.. D. Adjustable Frequency Drives: 1.. Refer to previous Section 2.07. E. Sequence of Operation: 1. Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans. 2. The sensor/transmitters shall be installed by the mechanical contractor and wired to the pump logic -- controller by the controls contractor. 3. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. 4. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. 5. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pumps decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further -- change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. 6. When the set point can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed distage sequence and continue variable speed operation. -As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. 7. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump/AFD fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically start the next variable speed pump/AFD set in sequence and continue variable speed operation. 8. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. 9. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, all AFDs shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. 10. PUMP/AFD fault shall be continuously scrolled through °- the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the pump logic controller has been manually reset. 15500-16 F. System Start-ups 1. The manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision to the installing contractor. 2. The manufacturer shall provide the owner's operating personnel a four hour training session. 2.09 HEATING WATER LOOP SYSTEM: A. General: 1. The secondary loop system shall be a variable speed system. The pumping system shall include, as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable frequency drive for each pump motor, remote sensors, motors,and pumps. 2. The pump manufacturer shall take "Unit Responsibility" for the successful operation of the system supplied by him. 3. The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping.systems. 4. The system consists of a variable speed pump sized to meet system duty condition as indicated on the pump schedule, adjustable frequency drives, a pump logic controller, and differential pressure sensors. 5. The pump manufacturer shall provide an analog output paddle wheel type flow measuring device suitable for operation to provide an input signal to the pump logic controller. 6. At the time'of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system profile analysis which shall include as a minimum: the pumps performance (variable speed pump curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve). 7. This system profile analysis shall.include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt/hour draw. 8. The programmable pump controller, and adjustable frequency drives shall be supplied as separate components. All functions of the components shall be tested'at the factory prior to shipment. Power wiring to the motors and interlock wiring shall be the responsibility of the electricalcontractor. Wiring from the sensors to the programmable controller shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. A complete wiring diagram shall be supplied at time of shipment that shows all field connections. B. Programmable Pump Logic Controller: 1. The controller shall be equal to ITT Bell and Gossett Technologic 2000 pump logic controller. The operator interface shall be flush mounted in the door of the packaged pumping system control cubicle. 15500-17 .. 2. The manufacturer shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable solid state variable speed pump controller. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including: motor overload, pump flow surges, NPSHR above NPSDHA, and hunting. 3. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its firmware in EPROM. On-line field modified data entries, such as set point, shall be stored in RAM memory. EPROM memory storage shall prevent accidental loss of memory due to voltage surge or spike. RAM memory shall be backed up by standard "D" cell batteries with low battery indication. In event of a catastrophic failure, all factory preset values shall be stored and shall be able to be recalled by the operator. 4. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to eight differential input analog signals and comparing them to their individual set points. It will then select the new analog that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. This system will use three differential inputs. 5. The analog -input signal shall be the feedback and the set point(s) shall be the command. The closed loop hydraulic stabilization function must have the capability of performing the traditional proportional, integral and derivative modes. The proportional function shall have a range and be infinitely programmable within that range. Rates shall be in percent gain. The integral function shall also be infinitely programmable and compatible with the adjustable frequency drives (AFD) and the hydraulic system. It shall be entered as repeats/minute. Derivative shall be entered in units of seconds within a fully programmable range allowing infinite entries within that range. 6. The scan and compare rate that selects proper set point and process signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum operation. 7. The pump controller shall have off line and on line diagnostic software. Off line diagnostics shall r consist of CPU, EPROM, and RAM memory test. It shall have self calibration of all analog inputs with diagnostics, display test, program test, and all I/O tested and status of above displayed. 8. On line diagnostics include off line diagnostics and operational diagnostics including but not limited to pump fault(s), AFD fault(s), overloads and �- sensor/transmitter fault(s). 15500-18 9. Further fault information may be accessed by interrogating the controller through the front mounted keypad. Exact pinpointing of a fault to a specific module shall be possible. In case of failure, the controller shall fail in a pre -determined safe operating mode. Reset after failure shall not result in a no -flow condition unless all equipment fails. 10. The controller shall be powered by 115V/1/60Hz. The incoming power and I/O circuitry shall reject electromagnetic (EMT) and radio frequency (RFI) interference. All digital inputs shall be opto-isolated. All outputs shall be electrically isolated. All inputs and outputs shall be modular and may be replaced without re -wiring or soldering. 11. All external sensor/transmitter furnished by the manufacturer shall be powered by the pump controller through an industrial quality 24 volt power supply. 12. Failure of any pump, motor, or drive in the system shall cause the controller to not only display the fault condition, but alternate or transfer operation to another operating unit. 13. The pump logic controller shall have loop alarms for all analog inputs. Failure of any remote transmitter shall remove that transmitter signal from the remaining control.functions, in random order, and display this occurrence. 14. The controller shall command the adjustable frequency drive to accelerate the pump to a point where it satisfies the programmed set point. Speed will remain constant until the set point is no longer satisfied. 15. In the event of failure due to a malfunction of the AFD it shall be turned off and the stand-by pump shall be automatically started through its AFD it shall be protected and controlled by the same pump controller. 16. A total of 33 analog and digital input/output shall be furnished. All input shall be overcurrent protected. All digital outputs shall be individually fused. Analog outputs shall be inherently short circuit protected. 17. Pump, AFD, and overload trip faults shall not clear automatically. They must be manually reset after correction of the fault. Turning off the control power shall not reset faults. All above faults shall be displayed before starting. First faults will always be displayed. Faults will not trigger erroneous fault messages. 18. The pump controller shall be self prompting. It shall display all messages in plain English. The messages shall include, but not be limited to; how to obtain default values, when to turn .it on, and if it is in the active remote control mode. 15500-19 �. 19. The read-out shall be bright vacuum fluorescent capable of displaying any set point value, input or output signals, and alarm function in engineering units. 20. The pump logic controller shall be capable of operating in automatic, manual or off-line diagnostics modes. --21. Keylock and software security shall be provided for protection of field programs and set points. C. Sensor/Transmitters: 1. Provide and install three complete, self-contained, strain gauge type differential pressure transmitters equal to a,B & G ST-102 DP. The transmitters shall be located where indicated on the drawings.. Wiring terminals and electronics shall be in separate compartments, so the electronics remain sealed during installation. Reverse polarity protection shall be included to keep wiring mishaps from damaging the transmitter. The 4-20mA DC signal shall be transmitted over a pair of No. 18 gauge shielded cable (supplied and installed by controls contractor). 2. Design range shall be as required by system. External zero and space adjustments, over -pressure to 2000 PSI, and no humidity effects. 3. Minimum accuracy shall be +/- 0.25% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Stability shall be +/- 0.25% of upper range limit for six months. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the transmitters. D. Adjustable Frequency Drives: 1. Refer to previous Section 2.07. E. Sequence of Operation: 1. Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans. 2. The sensor/transmitters shall be installed by the mechanical contractor and wired to the pump logic controller by the controls contractor. 3. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. 4. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. 5. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated -- lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the -lead pumps decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. 15500-20 6. When the set point can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed distage sequence and continue variable speed operation. As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. 7. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump/AFD fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically start the next variable speed pump/AFD set in sequence and continue variable speed operation. 8. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. 9. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, all AFDs shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. 10. PUMP/AFD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the pump logic controller has been manually reset. 11. In addition to controlling the heating water pumps, the, pump controller shall control the boilers as follows. 12. The boiler plant consists of two existing 250 HP Kewanee firetube boilers and a new 300 HP water tube boiler under this contract. 13. The heating water pumps and boilers shall.be energized thru the pump logic controller when the outside air temperature reaches 65 degrees. 14. Upon activation the pumps shall be enabled as described above and the boilers shall begin their operating sequence. 15. The controls contractor shall provide a pneumatic two-way two -position valve at the inlet of each boiler. The pumping system manufacturer shall provide an analog flow measuring device in the common supply header at the outlet of the boilers. 16. The new watertube boiler shall be Boiler #1 and the remaining two existing boilers shall be #2 and #3. 17. The pump logic controller shall open the valve to Boiler #1. After a three minute delay, Boiler #1 shall fire and its internal controls shall modulate the burner to maintain 180 deg. supply water. 18. On an increase in load, Boiler #1 shall modulate its own burners to increase its capacity.. 15500-21 19. When the flow measuring device reaches 650 GPM, the pump logic controller shall open the valve to Boiler #2. After a three minute delay, Boiler #2 will fire and modulate its burners under its own control to produce 180 degree water. 20. Boiler #3 shall come on line in the same manner when the flow measuring device reads 1150 GPM. �- 21. When load, and therefore flow, decreases the boilers shall go off line. The burners will turn off and after a one minute delay the valve shall close. This sequence will occur for every boiler as they come off line. 22. Boiler #3 shall come off line when the flow measuring device comes down to 1075 GPM. -" 23. Boiler #2 shall come off line when the flow measuring device comes down to 575 GPM. F. System Start-up: . 1. The manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision to the installing contractor. 2. The manufacturer shall provide the owner's operating A., personnel a four hour training session. 2.10 AIR UNITS (ROOF MOUNTED): A. Roof mounted Air Units RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6 and RTU-8 are three deck multi -zone units. RTU-7 is a single zone unit. Air units shall be provided as detailed on the drawings. Air units shall be special - construction weatherproof units for rooftop mounting. Air units shall be designed and built for outdoor installation. Indoor units modified for outdoor use are not acceptable. Capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Units shall be as manufactured by Temtrol or Heat Transfer.Specialties. B. Complete unit floor shall be 3" fiberglass insulated -- "double bottom" design with 16 ga. galvanized steel mastic coated inner floor and 20 ga. galvanized steel subfloor. C. Each air unit shall have gasketed man-sized double -wall access doors with double "Ventlock" heavy duty hardware latches and hinges. Doors shall be provided in the fan, coil and filter section. Door tieback shall be provided. Doors attached by screws or not continuously gasketed are not acceptable. D. Fan Casing: Fabricated of heavy gage steel sheets bolted -- to tubular steel structure reinforcing members. E. Casings seams shall be welded or bolted and sealed with a rubber based mastic. Use of sheetmetal screws to fasten side walls to unit framework is not permitted. F. Coil Casing: Fabricated of heavy gauge steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. 15500-22 G. Casings seams shall be welded or bolted and sealed with a rubber based mastic. Use of sheetmetal screws to fasten side walls to unit framework is not permitted. Coil frames shall not be used as structural members of the coil section. All coils shall be able to be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the coil casing. H. Drain pans shall be double clad insulated drain pans. Drains shall be full size as shown on the drawings. Drain pans shall extend under the complete coil section and shall be insulated between pans with 1" high density fiberglass insulation. Rigid inner pan shall be fabricated of 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. I. Fans: All fans shall be Class I AMCA rated, selected for maximum efficiency, delivery, static pressure, and BHP at the operating point. RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6, and RTU-8 shall have forward curved return fans and airfoil plug supply fans. RTU-7 shall have forward curved supply fan and return fan. J. Fan sections shall have internal inertia pads with 1" deflection spring isolators, neoprene base and stops. Fans shall have flexible connections. K. Fan curve shall indicate that operation is stable at 20% above and 20% below the selected RPM. L. Fan shaft shall be selected to operate at a speed 30% or more below its first critical speed. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. When the unit is running there shall be no visible deflection of any panel and no noise of metal to metal contact. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, objectionable noise or vibration is observed, the units shall be aligned and dynamically balanced on the job by a factory mechanic to industrial tolerances, at no additional cost. Balancing method.and tolerances shall be approved by the Engineer. Any defective component shall be replaced. M. Fan scrolls and wheels shall be designed as a unit with smooth belled inlet and cut-off. Fan wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be removable. N. Bearings shall be ball or roller type rated for 200,000 hour life. Bearing shall be bolted to structural bearing supports. Extend copper lube lines to a common convenient point. Each fan shaft shall have two bearings only. O. Motor and Drive: Motor shall be as specified under "Motors," this Section. Drive shall be selected for 120% of the maximum motor horsepower. For motors 30 hp and less provide an adjustable drive, selected for the RPM of the fan with 10% adjustment below the selected -speed. P. The motor shall be installed on adjustable rails or cradle to permit.belt tensioning and alignment. Provide flexible conduit for wiring the motor. 15500-23 .� Q. Provide a heavy belt guard for the belt drive, securely bolted to the unit casing with 1"xl"xl/4" angles. Field fabrication is acceptable for guard brackets if not available from the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with expanded metal secondary access door to each fan section. R. Cooling Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 4 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less than 6 fins per in. or more than 14 fins per inch. S. Heating Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded. a' T. Insulation: Casings shall be internally insulated with 2" thick 3 lb. neoprene coated fiberglas. U. Housing shall be mounted on a structural steel curb to be �. flashed into the roof construction as detailed on the drawings. All services to the unit shall enter the housing inside the curb. V. Fresh air intake shall have a rain hood with insect "- screen and louver. Relief outlets shall have raintight louvers. W. Units shall be complete with return air damper, fresh air damper, and relief damper. Dampers shall be of low leakage type with edge seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Refer to "Temperature Regulation" for sequence of operation. X. Filters: Each unit shall be furnished with 30% efficient throw away filters. Filter holding frames and locking devices shall be factory installed. Furnish one spare -' set of filters. Y. Roof Mounted Air Units RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6 and RTU-8 shall be provided with motorized low leakage zone mixing"dampers one for cold deck/bypass deck and one for hot deck/bypass deck for each zone. Furnish with interconnecting linkage as required for two actuators per zone. Damper actuators are provided by temperature controls contractor. Z. The unit manufacturer shall provide fused starters for each fan in each unit. Provide each starter with fuses, pilot lights, HOA switch, and 120V control power transformer. Interlock return fan to run with supply fan. Provide each unit with a 480V/120V center tapped ., transformer connected to main supply power with 15A primary in -line fuses and 15A secondary fuses to serve lights and convenience outlet. All components with the exception of the 480V/120V transformer shall be mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure with a main power disconnect mounted on the outside of each unit. The 480V/120V transformer shall be located in the unit. The unit ^- manufacturer shall completely wire the unit as per NEC for single point unit electrical service. 15500-24 AA. Each access door to a fan and motor shall have safety switches to shutdown the fan when the door is opened. BB. Each major compartment shall be provided with a lamp holder with vaporproof glass housing, wired by the unit manufacturer to a single weatherproof switch mounted in the face of the main power disconnect panel. Provide lamps for each socket. CC. Mount a weatherproof 120V convenience outlet in the face of the main power disconnect panel. DD. In addition, the unit manufacturer shall provide a compartment with an insulated access door to enclose a digital control panel provided by the temperature controls contractor. The dimensions for height, width and depth will be determined from the successful temperature controls bidder. The compartment shall have a steel panel to which a control panel can be mounted. Also provide openings in the compartment for control wiring and pneumatic tubing and air ventilation. The compartment shall be weatherproof. EE. Provide Dwyer Magnahelic gage across each filter bank complete with probes, cocks and tubing. Mount gage on temperature control panel downstream of filter bank. 2.11 BLOWER COIL AIR HANDLING UNITS: A. Furnish and install where shown on the plans blower coils either packaged or assembled from separate sections. Unit shall be installed with ductwork as indicated. Capacities shall be as scheduled. Units shall be Magic -Aire. B. Unit enclosure shall be insulated and constructed,of, galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Reversible filter rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent type filter that slides out for maintenance. C. Fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft, dynamically and statically balanced. The fan shall deliver scheduled cfm with required external static pressure. The fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently mounted. Fan motor assembly shall slide out for service. D. Cooling coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with all joints brazed. E. Heating coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with all joints brazed. F. Provide insulated condensate pan for cooling coil. 15500-25 .�, 2.12 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the electric unit heaters shown and scheduled on the drawings. The unit heaters shall conform to NFPA requirements and shall be UL listed. Units shall be Modine or equal. B. All components and controls, including thermostat, transformers, relays, and switches shall be enclosed .- inside the double walled, heavy gauge enameled steel case. C. The unit heaters shall be furnished with individually adjustable extruded aluminum louvers, thermal cutout safety switch, and fan delay switch. 2.13 VENTILATION FANS - PROPELLER TYPE: °^ A. Ventilator shall be belt driven axial type. Drive frame` assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle. Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering of propeller over spun venturi. B. Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub with gussets welded to three quarters of the blade length. The hub bore shall be a machined steel insert welded to the hub. A standard square key with two set screws and two retaining rings shall lock the propeller to the shaft. C. The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted in sealed ball bearings. Fully machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall be adjustable and sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower. D. Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities. E. The fan shall be mounted as shown with sheet metal connector to the louver with a flexible duct connector. F. Fan shall be Acme, Cook, Greenheck or equal. 2.14 COOLING COILS: A. ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 4 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less than 6 fins per in. or ^- more than 14 fins per inch. The scheduled pressure drops are maximum allowable valves. 2.15 HEATING COILS: A. ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded. The scheduled pressure drops are maximum allowable valves. . 15500-26 2.16 CONDENSING WATER OPEN LOOP SAND FILTER: A. Provide sand filter marked SF #1-90 on the drawings with Model HMF-36 packaged filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency Products Inc., or approved equal. Design to filter 142 gpm, filter area of 7.1 square feet. B. The filter system shall include a filter tank with permanent media, recirculating pump with removable pre -strainer, Sch. 80 PVC piping, automatic valves and controls for activating filtration and backwash modes, all mounted on a common base. Tank shall be fitted with pressure gauge and automatic air vent. C. The filter tank shall be constructed of ASTM-A7 carbon steel with working pressure of 100 psi. Tank shall have a manhole in the top of unit. Manhole shall be flange steel with gasket and bolt and yolk. A 4x6 handhole with bolt cover shall be provided in side shell for cleanout. Inlet and outlet connections shall be located in tank shell and shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe. Filter tank shall be supported by 360 degree steel skirt. D. Tank lining shall be epoxy coated and shall be applied to all interior surfaces of the tank. E. Internal components shall include an upper distribution system and lower collection system of Stainless Steel, hydraulically balanced for proper flow in both filter and backwash modes. F. All necessary face piping and valves shall be assembled complete at factory before shipping. Valves shall be (2) brass 3-way valves with single lever linkage. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on effluent and influent piping with gauge cocks. G. Controls shall be for automatic backflushing of media. Controls shall include an electric actuator and pressure activated switch to begin backflush. Controls shall include a pre-set timer for backwash, motor starter with overload and short circuit protection, transformer to provide 110v control power, manual backwash button mounted on access door, all mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure. H. Filter media shall produce a performance rating based on removal of 5 micron solids and larger with 90 efficiency. I. Pump shall be.bronze construction. Manufacturer shall verify pump performance to sufficiently operate with the given design. Pump shall have basket prestrainer. Motor shall be 460V/3PH, 3HP, TEFL. J. Filter shall use city water for backflushing filter media. Upon activation of backflush mode, a signal from the unit shall close three solenoid valves located in the makeup waterline to each tower to insure full water flow to the filter. At the end of the backflow mode, each of the three solenoid valves shall open. 15500-27 K. Provide an authorized factory representative to give a two-hour training session to the Owner's operating personnel. 2.17 CHILLED WATER/HEATING WATER CLOSED LOOP SAND FILTER: A. Provide for the chilled water loop a sand filter marked SF #2-90 on the drawings with Model CL 20TP packaged -- filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency Products, Inc., or approved equal. Filter shall be designed to filter 43 GPM and have 2.18 sq. ft. media area. B. Provide for the heating water loop a sand filater marked SF #3-90 on the drawings with Model CL20TP/300 packaged filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency ^- Products, Inc., or approved equal. Filter shall be designed to filter 43 GPM and have 2.18 sq. ft. media area. Filter shall be suitable for operation with up to ,., 300 degree water. C. The filter system shall include an ASTM carbon steel tank to withstand 150 psi. Overdrain and underdrain of each shall be stainless steel. Tank shall have epoxy lining. All face piping shall be schedule 40 carbon steel. D. Unit shall be valved and linked for automatic operation. Unit shall include all controls to provide for fully automatic operation. Controls shall be mounted in NEMA 3R Cabinet and include a 110V control transformer. E. Pump shall be 1 HP, 460V/3PH. Pump shall be 50 psi bronze construction with TEFC motor. F. Media shall be suitable for 90% efficient.removal of particles 10 microns or larger. G. Tank shall have 4x6 handhole in top and be suitable for the addition of chemicals through the top of the unit. H. An authorized factory representative shall give a two-hour training session to the Owner's operating a- personnel. 2.18 FLUE MOUNTED .DRAFT INDUCER: A. Install in the flue of the two domestic water heaters as shown on the plans a size 14D-1/4 induced draft fan as manufactured by Wing. The fan shall have a capacity of 1400 cfm at 0.35 in sp. and capable of handling flue gas up to 750 deg. F. B. The entire fan, motor, shaft and bearings shall be easily removable as a unit from the casing. C. Casing shall have 2 standard inlets, one fan duct connection and the other fan mounting a barometric damper. D. Motor shall be 1/2 hp, 1750 rpm Class B insulated operating at 120V/1PH. E. The draft inducer shall be interlocked with the water heaters to run when the heaters fire. 15500-28 2.19 COMBUSTION AIR PREHEAT COIL: A. Install as shown and scheduled on the drawings a combustion air preheat coil manufactured by Wing. B. Each heating coil to consist of built-in series of finned heating elements and bypasses with interlocked dampers. Each coil shall be capable of maintaining a constant discharge air temperature regardless of variations in entering air temperature with full hot water flow on the coil at all times. C. Proportioning of the air shall be such that the temperature at any point in a plane parallel to the face of the coil three feet downstream from the leaving side will not vary more than 5 degrees F. from the average discharge temperature. Dampers shall be 16 gauge roll formed, cold -rolled steel with baked enamel finish. D., Finned heating elements shall be fabricated of seamless return bend type copper tubes with rectangular aluminum fins spaced not closer than 10 fins per inch. Each tube shall be individually secured to the supply and return headers by a mechanical joint consisting of a nut and ferrule compression union, to allow for individual removal of tubes in the event of damage. Tubes shall be secured against vibration by a channel -shaped retainer, permitting expansion and contraction. Finned elements shall be factory tested at 1000 lbs. hydrosttaic pressure. E. Pressure drop of air through the coil shall not vary more than ±5%, regardless of the position of the internal dampers. End of Section 15500-29 SECTION 15600 - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and -- General Provisions. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an impartial Technical Firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work shall be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB firm. Refer to the attached TAB contract. _. B. The Owner will execute the attached contract with a TAB firm at an early stage of the work on this project. The TAB services covered by the attached contract will be paid for by the Owner. C. As a part of work under Division 15 the Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors and dampers as required for correct balance as required by ,-. the TAB firm, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Contractor shall provide and coordinate work under all sections of the specifications as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting and balancing period. E. In order that all systems may be properly tested, balanced and adjusted as required herein by these specifications, the Contractor shall operate said systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB and during the TAB period. F. Project contract completion schedules shall provide time frame allowance to permit the completion of TAB services prior to final acceptance. Provide simulated design condition loads as necessary. G. Documents: The Contractor shall transmit one copy of the �^ following records for review and comment by the TAB firm. 1. As -installed drawings 2. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Shop drawings 4. Instructions 5. Valve charts 15600-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. The scope of the TAB work defined herein, identified as TAB contract, is included in order that this Contractor shall understand the coordination, adjustment, and system modification which is required under the project work in order to complete the requirements for final TAB. The TAB firm will not have a contractual relationship with this Contractor but will be responsible to the Owner for the satisfactory execution of the TAB work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work which may be required in the TAB phases as defined and as may be necessary for the completion of the TAB as defined in the TAB contract. 3.02 SERVICES OF CONTRACTOR: A. The Contractor shall have all systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the Engineer that the project is ready for TAB services, and the Contractor shall so certify in writing that such a condition exists.. B. Should the Engineer be so notified and the TAB work commenced and the systems found not to be in readiness, or should a dispute occur as to the readiness of the systems, the Contractor shall request an inspection by the Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the Engineer whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for TAB services. Should the inspection reveal the TAB services notification to have been premature, all costs of the inspection and work previously accomplished by the TAB firm shall be paid for by the Contractor. C. Furthermore, items that are not ready for TAB services shall be completed, placed in operational readiness and TAB services shall again be requested. Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB services shall include the following: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors,.etc. to obtain projected operating conditions. 2. Air Distribution Systems: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. All supply, return and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as required by specifications. b. All volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. C. All supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers, and diffusers installed. 15600-2 d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc. shall be blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or leakage of air. e. All fans (supply, exhaust) are to be operating and verified for freedom from vibration, total air quantities. f. Drive belts shall be of proper size and tension. Heater elements shall be of proper size and rating. Provide record of motor amperage and "^ voltage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings. 3. Water Circulating Systems: r a. Check and verify pump alignment and rotation. b. Open all valves to full open position; close by-pass stop valves. Set mixing valves to full flow through system components. Remove and clean all strainers. Repeat operation until circulating water is clean. C. Record each.pump motor amperage and voltage. These shall not exceed nameplate rating. d. Verify electrical heater elements to be of proper size and rating. e. All water circulating systems shall be cleaned, full and free of air, expansion tanks set for proper water level, all air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. f. Check and set operating temperatures of heat_ exchangers to design requirements. 4. Automatic Controls: a. Check that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlock -., damper sequences, air and water resets, freezestats, POC detectors. b. All.controlling instruments calibrated and set for designed operating conditions with the exception of the room thermostats which shall be calibrated at the completion of test and balance. 5. The TAB will not instruct or direct the Contractor in any of the work, but will make necessary reports directly to the Engineer. The plans and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to install these devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. Should any such device not be readily accessible, the Contractor shall provide access as requested by the Engineer.' 6. Permanently mark all dampers, volume controls, and other settings after TAB. End of Section 15600. - 3 NOT IN CONTRACT INFORMATION ONLY TAB CONTRACT GENERAL: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper environmental conditions in the various spaces in the building, proper flows of air and water, correct setting of. regulating devices and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. DOCUMENTS: Each bidder will be furnished a set of bid documents for the project, including plans and specifications. These documents constitute apart of the contract for the construction of the project. Where the term "Contractor" occurs in this specification, reference is made to the Contractor for the construction of the project. AIR, WATER AND TEMPERATURE TESTING AND BALANCING: The balancing, testing, and adjusting of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems will be performed by an independent technical firm or balancing company with a minimum of five years .specialized experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing, and possessing calibrated instruments, qualified engineers, and skilled technicians to perform all required tests. The technical firm or balancing agency shall specialize and limit its business to testing and balancing of air conditioning systems. The services that are to be performed are as follows: 1. Inspect the installation of heating and cooling piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning, and ventilating systems. The inspection of the work shall cover that part relating to proper arrangement and adequate provisions for the testing and balancing. The inspections shall be performed periodically as the work progresses. 2. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. 3. Prepare and submit complete reports.on the balance and operations of the system. TAB CONTRACT - 1 4. Make a.total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure -that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. 5. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. The TAB agency shall be responsible for inspecting,'adjusting, balancing and logging the data on the performance of fans, all dampers in the duct systems, all air distribution devices, and the flows of steam or water through all coils. The Contractor -will �., provide all necessary data on the design and proper application of the systemic components and shall furnish all labor and material required to eliminate any deficiencies or malperformance. During the balancing the temperature regulation will be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor under."Temperature Regulation" using -- data submitted by the Balancing Agency. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of four successive eight hour days, in each separately controlled zone. The total variationshall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire survey period. In all fan systems, the air quantities.shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or ® motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner to attain the specified air volumes. The various water circulating systems shall be filled, purged of air and put into operation before hydronic balancing. The flow of water in the various systems shall be adjusted, using the flow meters and system balancing valves indicated at the various points in the systems. Before final acceptance is made, the balancing agency shall furnish the following data. TAB CONTRACT - 2 AIR SYSTEM DATA: a. Equipment (fan or factory fabricated station unit): (1) Installation Data (a) Manufacturer and Model , (b) Size (c) Arrangement, Discharge and Class (d) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, Cycles, and Full Load Amps. (e) Location and local identification data. (2) Design Data (a) Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications. (3) Fan Recorded (Test) Data (a) C.F.M. (b) Operating G.P.M. (From pump curves.if metering is not provided) (c) No -Load Amps (Where possible) (d) Full -Flow Amps (Where possible) (e) No -Flow Amps b. Air Heating and.Cooling Equipment (1) Design Data (a) Load (B.t.u.h. or MBH) (b) G.P.M. (c) Entering and leaving temperature (d) Entering and Leaving air conditions (D.B. and W.B.) ea. zone. (e) C.F.M. (f) Water Pressure Drop TAB CONTRACT - 3 (2) Recorded Data (a) Type of equipment and identification (location of number designation) (b) Entering and leaving air conditions (D.B. and W.B.) �. ea. zone (c) Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures .� (d) G.P.M. (e) Temperature rise or drop C. Duct Systems: (1) Duct Quantities (Maximum and Minimum) - Main, Submains, Branches, Outdoor (Outside) Air, Total Air, and Exhaust. (a) Duct size(s) (b) Number of Pitot tube (Pressure) Measurements (c) Sum of Velocity Measurements (Note: Do not add Pressure Measurements) (d) Average Velocity (e) Recorded (Test) C.F.M. (f) Design C.F.M. WATER SYSTEM DATA: a. Pumps (1) Installation Data (a) Manufacturer and Model °-' (b) Size (c) Type Drive (d) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, and Full Load Amps. (2) Design Data (a) G.P.M. TAB CONTRACT - 4 (b) Head (c) R.P.M. (d) B.H.P. and Amps (3) Recorded Data (a) Discharge Pressures (Full -Flow and No -Flow) (b) Suction Pressures (Full -Flow and No -Flow) (c) Operating Head TEMPERATURE CONTROL DATA: (1) Design Data (a) Inside design temperature (DB & WB) (b) Inside Relative Humidity (c) Outside Design Temperature (DB & WB) (2) Recorded Data (a) Hourly temperature readings (DB & WB) in each room (b) Corresponding Outdoor Temperature Readings (DB & WB) (c) Relative humidity The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions are required. Submit 4 copies of the report. FINAL ACCEPTANCE: At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Owner's Representative, specific and 'random selections of data (water and air quantities and air motion) recorded in the Certified Report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of Certified Report. TAB CONTRACT - 5 Selections for recheck.(specific plus random) in general, will not exceed 25 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a complete recheck for safety reasons. If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of ten percent or more from that recorded in the Certified Report listings, by ten percent or more of the selected recheck stations, the report shall be automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new Certified Reports submitted, and new inspection tests made, all at '^ no additional cost to the Owner. Following final acceptance of Certified Reports by the Owner, the ^^ settings of all valves, splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the Contractor, so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Devices shall ' not be marked until after final adjustment. End of Section TAB CONTRACT - 6 SECTION 15700 - TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. As an alternate to each Bid Item of this project, the control system shall be digital with pneumatic operators. All control and monitoring shall be done through a direct digital control panel. The direct digital control (DDC) system shall be state of the art and will include but not be limited to remote stopping and starting provisions, control loops, resetting arrangements, points monitoring and alarm indication. The DDC system shall include panels, thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, transducers, etc. to make it a complete DDC system in full accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications. C. The wiring for all the remote temperature indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Temperature Controls Contractor in accordance with Division 16 in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. D. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices 15700-1 of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. E. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers, and all automatic valves. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is'based on Honeywell or Johnson Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPRESSED AIR: A. Furnish complete, a duplex high pressure quiet reciprocating air compressor in the Temperature Controls Equipment Room with sufficient capacity to handle entire system under both Bid items with not more than 1/3 operation of the compressor system. B. Furnish with the compressor an ASME Code Construction ^� high pressure storage tank including drain connection. Provide with pressure controls, starters, PRV assembly and all accessories, including drain connection. Install a desiccant dryer system from the pump discharge to remove 99.5% of all oil present and any solid particle 0.03 microns and larger. The trapped oil and water shall be purged from the filter after each ON cycle. C. Provide a refrigerated moisture condenser with mounting bracket for dew point control of compressed air. D. Provide a timed automatic drain for both the air compressor and moisture condenser. E. The control air for AHU's 4,5,6,7,9 and 10 and RTU-1 thru 8 shall be supplied from a copper supply main header that extends from grid 1 to grid 15 of the building. This supply main shall be sized to handle the entire facility. Copper runouts shall come off the header to a central point in each mechanical room. Copper runouts shall be extended up each necessary chase to supply air to the roof mounted air units. 2.02 PIPING: A. All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all finished spaces. Tubing may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed. B. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed and either hard drawn or annealed where concealed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder -joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. 15700-2 C. Non-metallic tubing may be used in lieu of copper only inside control cabinets or for flexibility with short runs (24" maximum) to controls, and shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693-60T. Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM-D635 flammability test. D. Number -coded polyethylene shall be used inside control cabinets and shall be neatly tied and supported. Flexible connections bridging the cabinet and its door shall be neatly fastened along the hinge -side and protected against abrasion. E. It is the intent that all compressed air tubing included in this project be new and clean. All existing controls and tubing shall be removed from the building as much as possible. Tubing may be abandoned in place when removal is not possible. F. The Contractor shall employ a ceiling contractor to repair or replace any ceiling which must be removed to install any component of the control system. G. Exception: In inaccessible areas on the second level, existing tubing may be reused. All existing tubing shall be thoroughly purged of oil and water with a solvent. A final purge of dry nitrogen is required to dry the. system. All reused tubing shall be tested to hold 20 psi for 24 hours to insure the tubing is free of leaks. Absolutely all proposed tubing to'be reused shall be approved by the Engineer. H. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall make himself completely familiar with the project to account for any additional work required to install the control system. 2.03 GAUGES: A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.04 THERMOSTATS: A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished have plain cases and concealed adjustments specifically described otherwise herein. two pipe contrary. to plus or areas shall unless D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and capable of broad ranges of specific value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation.of any 15700-3 instrument wouldbe` improved "by changing its location, he shall so notify the Engineer. With the Engineer's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.05 SAFETY LOW LIMIT: A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest selection of its length. ~` 2.06 ELECTRIC THERMOSTATS: A. Electric thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type suitable for the application. Low voltage type shall have heat anticipation. Ratings shall be adequate for the applied load. 2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS. - A. Temperature Sensors: All master space temperature sensors and other space temperature indicating sensors shall be of the linear output type 50-100 degrees F range with blank locking covers. B. Duct Mounted or Immersion Sensors: Shall have spans of 100 degrees or 200 degrees F as required for a 3-15 psig p- pressure change. Averaging element sensors shall have a minimum 9' capillary element. Temperature sensors shall be of rigid stem using bi-metallic sensing elements except where averaging is required. C. Sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, tamper proof, suitable for mounting on a vibrating surface. If capillary type sensors are used, exposed capillary shall be temperature compensated, and armored or installed in protective tubing. D. All sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of .. the rod and tube type linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable protecting wells filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and tamper proof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting. 2.08 CONTROL VALVES, WATER: A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. 15700-4 C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.09 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS: A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges.of -40 degrees to 200 degrees F. B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All control dampers shall be standard products of the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 2.10 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS: A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. 2.11 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS: A. All controllers, thermometers, or temperature indicators, relays, switches, etc., as shown on the drawings shall be panel mounted. The panel shall be steel with hinged door. The temperature indicators (or thermometers) and switches shall be surface mounted on the door and tagged with plastic labels. B. A panel shall be provided for each air handling unit and each rooftop unit. 2.12 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL PANELS (DDC): A. Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and 15700-5 input/output modules. A"sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully met the requirements of this specification and the attached point list. B. Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and database including: - Control process - Energy Management Applications ,- - Alarm Management - Historical/Trend Data for all points - Maintenance Support Applications - Custom Processes - Operator I/O - Dial -Up Communications - Manual Override Monitoring -- C. Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: - Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts - Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control - Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements. - Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment. - Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring D. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit .-. easy expansion through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators. E. Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least on RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC ^' workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals. F. Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress T' induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be -- an orderly shutdown on all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non -Volatile memory shall be incorporated for _ all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. H. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall "- automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. I. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C port, or via telephone line dial -in. 15700-6 J. Data Communications: Communications between individual DDC's shall be via a single pair of twisted shielded wires with a minimum transmission speed of 9600 baud. Each bus of the communications network must be capable of supporting minimum of 30 devices. Provide all necessary drivers and modems required for DDC interconnection. K. The DDC communications network shall support true peer protocal allowing sensor sharing, inter DDC event programs, global application programs and bus to bus communications without the presence of a host processor. Each DDC shall have equal rights for data transfer and shall. report in its predetermined time slot. No single device shall be designated as the communications master but each device on the bus shall be capable of taking over the function of bus monitor to assure that loss of any device will not cause total bus failure. Every DDC must be capable of transmitting a message to another DDC as well as to all DDC's on the bus. L. Portable Operators Terminal: Each DDC panel shall be capable of supporting a portable operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display, and program additions and modifications. 1. There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting the standalone DDC panel Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable handheld unit. 2. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall• include, but not be limited to the following: - Start and Stop Points - Modify Setpoints - Modify PID Loop Setpoints - Override PID Control - Change Time/Date - Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling - Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling - Define Holiday Schedules - View Analog Limits Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits - Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits - Enter/Modify Analog Differentials —View Point History Files 3. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. M. As an alternative to the POT, a fixed liquid crystal or LED display and entry keyboard may be provided per DDC controller. Functional capability must be equal to that described for the POT as a minimum. The fixed display and keyboard must be under lock and key control to prevent tampering. 15700-7 N. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Local On/Off Status Indication shall be provided for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the use of an operator input/output device. Indicator lamps shall be located at the DDC panel or mounted in the face of a panel adjacent to the DDC panel. 0. Override Switches: Manual override switches for each connected point shall be provided. Hand/Off/Auto switches to be provided for each binary control point, and gradual switches for each pneumatic control point. These switches shall be located on either the control output module or mounted in the face of a panel adjacent to the DDC panel. r- 2.13 TIME CLOCKS: A. Time clocks shall be a Tork #7100L with 24 hour dial, reserve power, skip a day feature, and NEMA 1 enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS: A. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. B. All electrical interlocks.shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts on the disconnect switch so that interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch in thrown to the OFF position. ~- C. This contractor shall submit wiring diagrams for his equipment which when approved will become installation drawings. These diagrams shall show all interlock circuits and shall relate such diagrams of internal wiring of equipment items as are furnished by the manufacturers of that equipment of the system as a whole. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. 15700-8 3.03 APRON LEVEL BUILT UP SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS: BID ITEM #1 A., AHU-5, AHU-7 and AHU-9 are existing built-up single zone units being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This contractor will completely replace all existing controls, tubing, actuators, etc. to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in both the common chilled water coil outlet and common heating water coil outlet. The cooling coil of AHU-9 has already been replaced with a chilled water coil and two-way valve. C. On a call for cooling, the chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain the set point of a wall mounted thermostat in the space. On a call for heating, the heating water valve shall modulate to maintain the set' point of the thermostat. There shall be a deadband between heating and cooling so that both valves close to the coil. D. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan. E. This contractor shall provide a maximum outside air, damper, minimum outside air damper, maximum exhaust damper, minimum exhaust damper, and return air damper to be installed by the mechanical contractor as scheduled on the drawings. F. When the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper open to provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed. 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees; Minimum outside air damper full open. Maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). G. The minimum exhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. H. The outside air dampers shall close when the fans are off. I. These air units shall be provided with night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. 15700-9 A� J. See Division 16 for ionization detection. K. A low limit thermostat in the mixed air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers, and position both the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when the temperature drop's below 38 degrees. L. Upon a loss of control air, the heating water valve shall ._, be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. 3.04 APRON LEVEL TWO -DECK MULTI -ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT: BID ITEM #1 A. AHU-6 is an existing two -deck Trane multi -zone unit being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This -- contractor will completely replace all existing controls, tubing, actuators, etc. to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in both the chilled water coil outlet and the heating water coil outlets as shown on the drawings. C. The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. D. The heating water valve shall modulate to maintain a•hot deck temperature of 110 degrees when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below and reset to 80 .� degrees when the outside air temperature is 70 degrees. When the outside air temperature is above 75 degrees the heating water valve shall close. E. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan. F. This contractor shall provide new actuators for each of the four existing zone mixing dampers. Each zone mixing ^` damper shall modulate to satisfy the setpoint of a thermostat mounted in the space or in the return air, as shown on the drawings. - G. The existing unit has minimum and maximum outside air dampers, minimum and maximum exhaust dampers and return air damper. When the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper open to provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed. 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). H. The minimum exhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air, damper shall operate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. 15700-10 e, I. AHU-6 shall be provided with night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on.the drawings. The night -set -back temperature sensor shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. J. The outside air dampers shall close when the supply fan is off. K. See Division 16 for ionization detection. L. A low limit thermostat in the mixed.air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers and open the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when .the temperature drops below 38 degrees. M. Upon a loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. 3.05 APRON LEVEL TEXAS MULTI-ZONE.AIR HANDLING UNITS: BID ITEM #1 A. AHU-4 and AHU-10 are existing Trane two -deck multizones air handling units being converted to a Texas multizone configuration. Also these units are being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This Contractor will completely replace all existing controls, tubing, actuators, etc., to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in the chilled water coil outlet and in the outlet of each duct mounted zone heating coil as shown on the drawings. AHU-10 has previously been converted to chilled water cooling and a two-way valve has been installed. C. The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. D. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan. E. This contractor shall provide new actuators for two zones from each air unit. The existing zone mixing dampers shall be linked as required for the two new zones. F. The dampers shall modulate to maintain the setpoint of a wall mounted thermostat or a return air thermostat for each zone as shown on the drawings. G. On a call for cooling, the cold deck and bypass deck dampers shall modulate and the heating water valve shall be closed. On a call for heating, the cold deck damper shall be closed and the bypass damper shall be open. The heating water valve shall modulate to maintain the setpoint of the thermostat for that zone. H. There shall be deadband between cooling and heating when the dampers are in full bypass and the heating water valve is closed. 15700-11 I. The existing unit has minimum and maximum outside air dampers, minimum and maximum exhaust dampers and return air damper. When .the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper open to provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed. 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). J. The minimum exhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air damper shall operate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. K. The outside air dampers shall close when the supply fan is off. L. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. M. See Division 16 for ionization detection. N. A low limit thermostat in the mixed air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers and open the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when the temperature drops below 38 degrees. O. Upon a.loss of control air, the heating water valve shall .-. be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. 3.06 ROOFTOP MOUNTED THREE DECK MULTIZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS: BID ITEM #2 A. These units are new blow -through three deck multizone units. The unit manufacturer will provide the cold deck/bypass deck, hot deck/bypass deck zone mixing dampers, chilled water coil, heating water coil, outside air damper, return air damper and exhaust air damper. .� B. This contractor shall furnish a two-way modulating valve in the chilled water coil outlet. A thermostat, in the cold deck discharge shall modulate the valve to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. C. Furnish a two-way modulating valve in the heating water coil outlet. A thermostat in the hot deck discharge ' shall modulate the valve to maintain a hot deck temperature of 110 degrees when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below and reset to 80 15700-12 degrees when the outside temperature is 70 degrees. When the outside air temperature is above 75 degrees the heating water valve shall close. D. Two damper actuators shall be provided to modulate the mixing dampers for each zone. The dampers shall modulate to maintain the space temperature sensed by a wall mounted thermostat for each zone,'as shown on the drawings. On a call for cooling, the cold deck and bypass dampers shall modulate and the hot deck damper shall be closed. On a call for heating, the hot deck and bypass dampers shall modulate and the cold deck damper shall be closed. E. This contractor shall.furnish an outside air damper actuator, a return air damper actuator, and two exhaust air damper actuators. When the supply fan is running, the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Outside air damper is open to minimum position to provide ventilation air (adjustable). 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: outside air damper full open and return air damper fully closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of 60 degrees. F. The outside air damper shall close when the supply fan is off. G. The exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the outside air damper. H. A low limit thermostat in the supply fan discharge shall stop the supply fan and position the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open when the temperature is 38 degrees or below. I. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. J. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan by the unit manufacturer. K. See Division 16 for ionization detection. L. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night-set-back,temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. 3.07 ROOFTOP MOUNTED SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT: BID ITEM #2 A. This unit is a single zone draw-thru air unit. The unit manufacturer will provide chilled water coil, heating water coil, outside air damper, return air damper, and exhaust air damper. 15700-13 ,. B. This contractor shall furnish`a two-way modulating valve in the chilled water coil outlet and a two-way modulating valve in the heating water coil.outlet as shown on the drawings. C. A thermostat in the space shall modulate the chilled water valve on a call for cooling and modulate the heating water valve on a call for heating. There shall ..a be a deadband between the switch over from heating to cooling such that both valves are closed to their coil. D. This contractor shall furnish an outside air damper actuator, a return air damper actuator, and two exhaust air damper actuators. When the supply fan is running, the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Outside air damper is open to minimum position to provide ventilation air (adjustable). 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: outside air damper full open and return air damper fully closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of-60 degrees. E. The outside air damper shall close when the supply fan is off. -:. F.. The exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the outside air damper. G. A low limit thermostat in the supply fan discharge shall stop the supply fan and position the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open when the temperature is 38 degrees or below. H. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall ^-, be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. I. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the a.. supply fan by the unit manufacturer. J. See Division 16 for ionization detection. K. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. 3.08 APRON LEVEL BLOWER COIL UNITS: BID ITEM #2 A. These units are a draw thru single zone configuration. The unit manufacturer will provide a chilled water coil and a heating water coil. B. This contractor shall furnish a modulating two-way valve in the chilled water coil outlet and a modulating two-way valve in the heating water coil outlet. . 15700-14 C. A thermostat in the space shall modulate the chilled water valve on a call for cooling and modulate the heating water valve on a call for heating. There shall be a deadband between the switch over from cooling to heating such that both valves are closed to their coil. D. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall open and the chilled water valve shall close. E. A safety low limit thermostat located on the upstream side of the heating water coil shall stop the fan and open the heating water valve when the temperature is below 38 degrees. F. When the fan is turned off, both valves shall close. G. See Division 16 for ionization detection. 3.09 APRON LEVEL DOOR HEATERS/UNIT HEATERS: BID ITEM #2 A. These are existing hot water type heaters with existing electric fan cycling thermostats. B. This contractor shall provide a two -position electric valve in the coil outlet to open when the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off.. 3.10 APRON LEVEL FOUR PIPE FAN COIL UNITS: BID ITEM #2 A. These are existing four pipe fan coil units. B. This contractor shall provide an electric heating/cooling thermostat mounted on the wall in the space as shown on the drawings. Also provide two -position electric valves in the outlet of the cooling coil and the outlet of the ,heating coil. C. When the cooling thermostat calls for cooling, the electric valve on the chilled water coil shall open and the fan shall cycle on. The valve shall operate with the thermostat and close when the fan is off. D. When the heating thermostat calls for heating, the electric valve on the heating water coil shall open and the fan shall .cycle on. The valve shall operate with the thermostat and close when the fan is off. 3.11 EMERGENCY GENERATOR - VENTILATION AIR BID ITEM #1 A. This generator has existing automatic dampers for ventilation and exhaust. B. This contractor shall provide actuators to open the ventilation and exhaust dampers when the unit is running and close the dampers when the unit is off. 3.12 CHILLER ROOM VENTILATION FAN: BID ITEM #1 A. A wall mounted propeller fan shall cycle to provide ventilation air to the chiller room space when the temperature reaches 80 degrees (adjustable): 15700-15 B. This contractor shall also provide automatic dampers sized as shown on the drawings for intake and fan exhaust. The dampers shall.open when the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off. 3.13 BOILER ROOM VENTILATION FAN: BID ITEM #2 A. A wall mounted propeller fan shall cycle to provide ventilation air to the boiler room space when the temperature reaches 80 degrees (adjustable). B. This contractor shall also provide an automatic damper in the'fan inlet to open when the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off. ^' 3.14 BOILER ROOM COMBUSTION AIR PREHEAT: BID ITEM #2 A. The combustion air preheat coil is a Wing type coil with integral clamshell dampers. This contractor shall provide a damper actuator and a two-way two -position valve in the coil outlet. B. When the outside air temperature is at or below 60 degrees, the two-way valve shall open. C. Upon a loss of control air the two-way valve shall open and the dampers shall open to the coil. �- D. A thermostat on the downstream side of the dampers shall modulate the dampers to maintain a temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). 3.15 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER FLUE MOUNTED DRAFT INDUCER: BID ITEM #2 A. The draft inducer will consist of a fan and motor located in the flue of the domestic water heaters. B. The domestic water heaters are Teldyne Laars 335 MBH heaters, each. �. C. This contractor shall interlock the draft inducer fan to operate when either one or both water heaters are burning. 3.16 SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS: BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 ... A.' The secondary chilled water pumps will be variable speed drive. Each chilled water loop shall have a pressure sensor located in supply and return lines as shown on the drawings. The sensors will be supplied by the pump logic controller manufacturer. B. This contractor shall provide and install the.wiring from the sensors to the programmable pump logic controller located in the chiller room. Refer to Section 15500. 0 15700-16 3.17 WATER COOLED CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER PLANT BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 A. The chiller plant will be controlled by system supplied by the chiller manufacturer. All wiring and connections will be done by the chiller manufacturer. 3.18 COOLING TOWERS/CONDENSER WATER LOOP: BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 A. The condenser water system consists of an existing 1050 gpm Ceramic cooling tower and two new 1050 gpm Ceramic cooling towers. Each tower consist of a condenser water - pump, a fan and motor, internal fill and piping. One of the two new towers will be installed under Bid.Item #1 And the other under Bid Item #2. The existing tower control system shall be changed to operate as described herein. B. This contractor shall furnish an automatic two -position two-way isolation valve for each tower and a three-way modulating bypass valve for each new tower. C. The cooling towers are intended to be a complete standalone system. They shall be controlled as described hereinafter by a digital control system sized to control all three towers. The digital control panel shall be located in the mechanical fan room at AHU-11 and AHU-12 as shown on the drawings. The digital control panel shall be as specified under "Products", this section. D. Each of the cooling tower fans shall be driven by an adjustable frequency driver. The logic control for the adjustable frequency driver shall be provided by the digital control panel. E. On a call for condensing water from the chiller plant, the digital control panel, hereinafter called DCP, shall select the cooling towers with the least run time hours to date. The DCP shall open the two-way isolation valve and start the condenser water pump of the selected tower and prove flow by a differential pressure switch across the pump. The DCP shall provide an output signal to the. chiller plant that the pump is providing flow. Upon a call for additional condensing water, the DCP shall select, based on least runtime hours to date, the next tower to come on line . The DCP shall open the two-way isolation valve and start the condenser pump of the next selected tower and prove flow by a differential pressure switch across the pump. The DCP shall provide an output. .signal to the chiller plant that the pump is providing flow. The sequence is the same for additional towers. F. The DCP shall select the next tower when the selected tower is manually switched off-line. This is based upon the HOA switch being in the "OFF" position. 15700-17 �-, G. When a cooling tower has been energized and brought on line by the DCP, the cooling tower fan and three-way bypass valve shall be controlled to provide 85 degree condensing water sensed in the common condensing water supply header. H. When the first tower is energized, the three-way modulating valve shall be fully open to the tower and the DCP shall "soft start" the fan through the adjustable frequency drive, hereinafter called the AFD. On arise in condensing water supply temperature the DCP shall increase the speed on the fan through the AFD. On a drop in condensing water supply temperature, the DCP shall decrease the speed of the fan through the AFD. The minimum speed of the fan shall be 40 percent of full speed. On a further drop in temperature, the fan shall stop and the modulating three-way valve shall begin to open to bypass the tower. There shall be dead band between fan off and modulating bypass. The three-way modulating valve shall modulate to full bypass upon a further decrease in temperature. When a second tower is brought on-line, the DCP shall modulate the three-way valve and the AFD to match the operating point of the tower already running. The DCP shall always "soft start" the fans. The DCP shall control the two towers in unison to maintain the condensing water supply temperature. Additional towers shall be started in the same way. I. There shall be a five minute time delay between tower start and control modulating to avoid "hunting". J. The cooling tower manufacturer will provide a vibration switch and an oil level switch for each fan. The DCP shall stop the fan when any of these switches makes contact. K. The DCP shall report output signals to a remote annunciator panel in the chiller room. This panel shall have labeled LED's mounted on its face to indicate the following for each tower: 1. Condenser pump running 2. Fan running 3. Tower in bypass mode 4. Vibration switch cutout 5. Low oil level 3.19 HEATING WATER SYSTEM: BID ITEM #2 A. The heating water pumps will be variable speed drive. Each heating water loop shall have a pressure sensor located in supply and return lines as shown on the drawings. The sensors will be supplied by the pump logic controller manufacturer. B. This contractor shall provide and install the wiring from the sensors and boilers to the programmable pump logic controller located in the boiler room. Refer to Section 15500. 15700-18 0 C. This contractor shall provide slow acting, pnuematic, two-way two -position valves in the inlet to each boiler and any air supply lines, gauges, PRV's, transducres, etc. required to operate the valve from the pump logic controller output. 3.20 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL: A. As an alternate to each Bid Item of this project, this contractor shall submit a price for a complete operating digital control system in place of the pnuematic system specified under the base bid. The digital control system shall provide full control and monitoring to accomplish the sequence for each piece of equipment as hereinbefore described. Equipment such as chillers, cooling towers, boilers and pumps shall be controlled by their own systems just as they are under base bid and/or described under Section 15500. B. It is the intent of these alternates to provide control for each system under the alternates as described: 1. Bid Item #1, Alternate #1-1: This alternate shall include the components necessary to control and/or monitor the following: - (3) Apron Level Built Up Air Units; AHU-5, AHU-7 and AHU-9. - (3) Apron Level Multi -Zone Air Units; AHU-4, AHU-6, and AHU-10. - Monitoring of chillers and primary and secondary chilled water pumps. - Cooling Tower DDC system. 2. Bid Item #2, Alternate #2-1: This alternate shall include the components necessary to control and/or monitor the following: - (8) Rooftop Mounted Air Handling Units Boiler Plant Monitoring - Heating Water Pump Monitoring 3. Alternate #3-1: This alternate shall include the conversion of existing AHU-1, AHU-2, AHU-3, AHU-11 and AHU-12 to DDC control. These units have an existing operable Honeywell Control System. Valves and actuators may be reused but control shall be DDC. C. The DDC system shall control the following points under the appropriate Alternate. 1. Start/Stop - Air Handlers, including return fan interlock. 2. Temperatures - Supply air temperature - Cold deck temperature - Hot deck temperature - Thermostat temperatures 3. Flow Rates: - Outside Air CFM 15700-19 D. The DDC system shall monitor the following points under the appropriate alternate: .1. Air Handling and Roof Mounted Air Units - Outside.air temperaure °'- - Mixed air temperature Supply air temperature - Cold deck temperature (multi -zone) - Hot deck temperature (multi -zone) - Cooling Coil GPM (thru venturi flow measuring device) -Heating Coil GPM (thru venturi flow measuring device) - Leaving water temperature 2. Chilled Water System - Secondary Pumps running (thru pump differential pressure) - Supply water temperature - Return water temperature - Secondary Chilled Water GPM (thru venturi flow measuring device) - Primary pumps running (thru pump differential pressure) - Chiller running 3. Heating Water System - Pumps running (thru pump differential pressure) - Boilers running - Supply water temperature - Return water temperature - Supply water GPM (thru venturi flow measuring device) 4. Cooling Tower System Return water temperature Supply water temperature - Supply water GPM (thru venturi flow measuring device) - Fan speed (percentage of full speed) - Mode (fan or bypass) 3.21 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT: A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the r- system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. 15700-20 B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two six -hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hardcover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. D. Provide a control data sheet for each typical system, mounted under plexi-glass. The control data sheet shall include a schematic of the unit with all dampers and valves identified. The sequence of operation shall appear clearly explained with references to the schematic. Typical operating pressures shall be defined for each actuator. The control data sheet for each system shall be mounted in the mechanical room which contains that system. Control data sheets for Roof Mounted Air Units shall be mounted inside -the access door to the damper section. 3.22 GUARANTEE: A. The temperature regulation subcontractor shall guarantee all workmanship and material in the temperature regulation system for a period of one year, such guarantee dating from the date of the final acceptance of the entire air conditioning system by the Engineer. End of Section 15700-21 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements,. and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all �^ rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS: A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL.listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make condit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or ^ in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. 16110-1 "I C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 2.03 WIREWAYS: A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.04 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. 16110-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits. In sizes up to and including 1-1/2", electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, .such as accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where 6' above the floor. EMT shall not be used outside, in concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in locations likely to be damp, or exposed within 6' of the floor. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" Tong at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or.flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. 16110-3 F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or.connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. 3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical conduit risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron 'one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable 16110-4 .. type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger.sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building -- construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. End of Section 16110-5 M SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of, the General .Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, including pulling devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW or THWN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject.to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. 2.02 JOINTS AND SPLICES: A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 16120-1 Mi 2.03 COLOR CODING: A. Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. D. Phase conductors shall be yellow, brown and orange for phases A, B, and,C respectively in the 480 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE PULLING: A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. 'All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to ,be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate �^ future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 16120-2 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Feeders:' Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints.or.splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as 'shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. B. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. C. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. E. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. F. Power and Lighting circuits of different system voltages (eg. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit. G. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. H. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. I. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. J. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. 16120-3 K. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. End of Section 16120-4 SECTION 16140 — WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES: A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO a. Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-I b. Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-I B. For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. a. Single pole wall switch 1221 or 1221-I b. Three-way wall switch 1223 or 1223-I 2.03 RECEPTACLES: A. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5262 or 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R). 16140-1 interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. E. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. F. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning and plumbing equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner of under other Divisions of the.specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. C. Provide all power wiring for the proper connection of mechanical control devices. Verify all locations and requirements with Division 15 and mechanical plans. End of Section 16150-2 SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include, all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be fused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. End of Section 16170-1 B. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF 5262 or GF 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R) . C. Outdoor receptacle with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GFA315. -- 2.04 OTHER DEVICES: A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift cover. 2.05 COVERPLATES: A. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation °^ "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of -a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS: A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by .-- the Architect, install devices at the following heights. DEVICE. MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4'6" Receptacle 12" End of Section 16140-2 SECTION 16150 - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 -.GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS: A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS: A. All motor starters (controllers) and control.equipment shall be furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications unless noted otherwise. The starters and control equipment shall conform with the schedule on the drawings. B. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units as indicated. C. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. D. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches with each starter. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish 16150-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the general conditions, special conditions, general requirements, and .� supplemental,conditions. 1.02 SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing identification signs on all electrical devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES: A. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. B. Where existing devices are to serve new devices, nameplates shall be replaced with new nameplates in accordance with 16195-2.01A. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT: ^ A. All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: ,., 1. Switchboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Motor control centers. 4. Dry type transformers. 5. Main switches. B. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a typewritten list of all mechanical equipment and fuse sizes that were installed and connected under this project. 3.02 CONTROL DEVICES: A. All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Contactors 2. Motor Starters -- 3. Relays 4. Disconnect Switches 5. Timeclocks End of Section 16195-1 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform wit h 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products. 1.03 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in-service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. End of Section 16450-1 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 5 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes.as required to house the panelboards., B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. E. Panelboards, Generally: Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors 16470=1 for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. H. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits and their locations mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. J. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." K. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. L. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name and voltage. M. Ground Bus: Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. 2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below.. B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. C. Panelboards for 480 volts Service: General Electric Series A, Type AE, with Type TEF or TEF4 breakers in 15 to 100 ampere sizes; Type TFJ subfeed breakers in sizes above 100 amperes and not over 225 amperes. 2.03 FUSIBLE SWITCH DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of fused switches scheduled on the drawings, with main switch or lugs only on'the mains as noted. 16470-2 0 B. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type QMR panelboards with positive, quick make, quick break fusible switches. End of Section 16470-3 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and.incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES: A. Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. B. Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during construction and testing. C. Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. D. Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. E. Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any equipment until the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to energizing the equipment. F. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. G. Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to those indicated on the plans. 16475-1 H. Type.KRP-C: Class L; Bussman Type KRP-C "Hi -Cap", . current limiting with time delay, interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, current rating 601-4000 amperes. I. Type LP: „Class RK-1; Bussmann Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak". Fuses shall be available in ratings 0-600 amperes, shall be current limiting dual element with time. delay, and shall have interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection feature. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS: •- A. 120 Volt Molded Case Circuit Breakers: One, two and three pole, thermal magnetic, bolt -on UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. UL listed for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole. UL listed as HCAR type, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole. Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with "^ quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. Thermal -magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 deg. C. or 75 deg. C. conductors. Terminations for 35-100 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 75 deg. C conductors. Accessories shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Interrupting rating shall be as shown on the drawings. 0 r.. End of Section 16475-2 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40,watt, rapid start ballasts installed in'an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be General Electric "Watt -Miser" or equivalent energy saving .ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. D. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. E. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. F. Fluorescent Lamps: Standard Cool White. 16500-1 P-- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. C. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. 0 End of Section 16500-2 r- SECTION 16723 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.00 SCOPE: A. This specification provides the requirements for a fire detection and alarm system. The system shall include but not be limited to: control;,panel, alarm initiating devices, conduit, wire and accessories required to provide a complete operational system including input and output devices for the connection of existing zones and existing output devices 1.01 STANDARDS: A. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards: B. National Electric Code, Article 760. C. National Fire Protection Standards: NFPA 71 Central Station signaling Systems -Protected Premises Unit. NFPA 72A Local Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72D Protective Signaling Systems -Protected Premises Unit. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors. NFPA 72F Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems D. Local and state building codes. E. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. G. The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable: UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 228 Door Closers -Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 16723-1 1..02 SUBMITTALS: A. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for. the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications. B. Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to the start of system installation, the Distributor shall submit a complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and equipment, to the General Contractor. C. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that .� specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. 1.03 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS: A. All references to manufacturer's or supplier's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of.performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. 1.04 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, an listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. 1.05 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION: A. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by -- one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Alarm LED shall flash. 2. A local Piezo-Electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 3. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, includiong: type of alarm point, its location within the protected premises, and the time and date of that activation. 4. All system output programs assigned. 16723-2 5. Air units protected by the alarming zone shall be shut down. 6. All audio and visual devices shall be activated. B. When a trouble condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Trouble LED shall flash. 2. A local Piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 3. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm trouble condition, including: type of trouble point, its location within the protected premises, and the time and date of that activation. 4. Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an Alarm occurs during a Trouble sequence, the Alarm condition will have display priority. 1.06 CONTROL PANEL: A. The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface. The back box and door shall be constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections -into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. The cabinet shall be approximately 5 inches deep and 24 inches wide. Height shall be approximately 20, 29, 37 or 46 inches, depending on the number of modules required. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion. B. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to the following capacities: Intelligent/Addressable Loops 10 Intelligent Detectors per loop 99 Addressable Modules per loop 99 Total Intelligent Detectors 990 Total Addressable Monitor or Control Modules 990 Total Intelligent/Addressable devices per system 1980 C. One loop interface board (LIB) shall be provided to monitor and control each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop of intelligent detectors and addressable modules. The LIB shall contain its own microprocessor. D. The LIB shall communicate and provide power to all devices on its loop over a single pair of wires. For Style 6 operation, the loop is returned to the LIB and in the event of a single wire break in the loop, the system shall continue to detect any alarm conditions. For Style 4 operation the SLC loop is not returned, and branch circuits (t-tap) connections may be made off of the loop. Loop wiring shall be twisted pair of up.to 10,000 16723-3 _ ft. in length. Wire size shall be 18 to 12 AWG, depending in distance. Power to Audible Devices and other conventional peripherals requiring separate power shall be provided from the Main Power Supply in the control panel. The LIB shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors and shall process this information to determine normal, alarm, or trouble conditions. The analog information may also be used for automatic test and determination of maintenance requirements. E. The LIB shall communicate with each intelligent detector and Addressable Module on its SLC loop and verify proper function,and individual status. Communication with up to 198 such devices shall be performed every 6 seconds or less. Average time to detect -an alarm shall be 3 seconds (longer for alarm verification detectors). F. The central processing unit module (CPU) shall �., communicate with, monitor, and control all other modules in the panel. Removal, disconnection or failure of any control panel module shall be detected and reported by the Central.Processing Unit. The CPU shall contain and execute all control -by -event programs for specific action to be taken if a fire situation is detected in the system. Such control -by -event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. The CPU shall also provide areal -time clock for time annotation on the display CRT and printer. G. The .Display Interface Board (DIA) shall provide all controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all control panel parameters. The DIA shall contain, and display as needed, custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors and addressable modules. Such label ^- information shall be stored in programmable non-volatile memory. H. The DIA shall provide an 80-character alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide 5 Light -Emitting -Diodes (LEDs) for AC POWER; SYSTEM ALARM; SYSTEM TROUBLE; DISPLAY TROUBLE; and SIGNAL SILENCE. The DIA shall provide a 25-key touch key -pad with control capability to command all system functions, and entry of all alphabetic or numeric information. The key -pad shall include means to enter two different passwords to prevent �. unauthorized manual control.or programming. I. The Serial Interface Board (SIB) shall provide the following interfaces: Iff" 1. One port for P-80 Printer (RS 232c). �-- 2. One port for CRT-1 (RS0232c). J. The power supply for the panel and all fire alarm peripherals shall be integral to the control panel. The r-- power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs as well as 3 amperes of 16723-4 I-, unregulated 24 VDC power for external audio-visual devices. The audio-visual power may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for power -limited operation on all external initiating circuits and indicating circuits. Positive -temperature -coefficient thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over -current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. Input power shall be 120 VAC 60 Hz. The power supply shall provide integral charger for use with 23 AH internal batteries, or external battery and charger systems may be connected to the power supply. K. The control panel shall be a Notifier Model Number AM2020 with the internal components described above. 1.07 SYSTEM COMMON CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION: A. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new Alarm and/or Trouble condition shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the System Alarm or Trouble LED from flashing mode to steady -ON mode. If additional new Alarm or Trouble conditions exist or are detected and reported in the system, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. In this case, the local pieazo sounder shall not silence,and the Alarrm/Trouble LEDS shall not transfer to their steady -on mode, thus signaling to the operator that more Alarm/Trouble conditions are present in the system. B. Alarm conditions shall always have display priority before Trouble conditions. C. Occurrence of any new Alarm or Trouble conditions in the system shall cause the Control Panel to resound the Local Piezo electric signal and repeat the Alarm or Trouble sequences. D. Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays which are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable. E. Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically- latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. If the alarm condition(s) still exist, or if they re -occur in the system after System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions. F. Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all Intelligent/Addressable detectors in the system. The System Test shall activate the 16723-5 electronics in each intelligent sensory simulating an alarm condition and causing the transmission of the alarm condition from that sensor to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. The Fire Alarm Control Panel record the data from each sensor installed in the system. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the System Liquid Crystal Display. r-. G. Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall sequentially turn on all LED indicators, System Liquid Crystal Display and .Local Piezo-Electric signal, and then automatically return the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the previous condition. 1.08 SYSTEMS OPERATION: �^ A. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits. All programming shall be accomplished through the standard common control panel keyboard or through the use of the optional CRT-1 keyboard. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. The programming function shall be enabled with a special 5-digit password that may be defined specifically for the system when it -- is installed. B. This password may be changed to a new value at any time by the installing Distributor. In the event that the �.. Installing Distributor may define a password and then lose or forget it, the system shall be designed so that the valid password may be determined by special procedures available through the system manufacturer. C. Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent detectors in the system from the System keypad or from the keyboard of the .., CRT-1. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window, and shall be a HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW selection. D. Each of the Intelligent/Addressable Smoke Detectors in the system may be selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The Alarm Verification Function shall be from 5-50 seconds and each detector shall be able to be enabled/disabled during the field programming of the system, or anytime after system turn -on. The Alarm Verification shall not require any additional hardware to be added to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. E. The Fire Alarm System shall be equipped with a Signal Silence Inhibit feature which will prevent the operator from silenceincing any of the signals for a period of 30 seconds. The function of this Signal Silence Inhibit Timer shall be field programmable and it's limit shall be field definable, without the need for the installation of any hardware modules into the system. 16723-6 F. The Fire Alarm System shall be equipped with a Automatic Signal Silence Cut -Out feature which will automatically silence all of the signals after a period of 120 seconds. (1-1040 seconds). The function of this Automatic Signal Silence Cut -Out Timer shall be field programmable and it's limit shall be field definable, without the need for the installation of any hardware modules into the system. 1.09 SYSTEM REPORTS AND DATA AQUISITION: A. The. -system will be able to generate and print a summary of all of the Detectors, Modules, Pull Stations, and Zones which are currently active in the System. This display will require password protection to prevent unauthorized user access, and will automatically print the system report using "soft" (single push) keys. No computer expertise will be required to initiate the System Report sequence.` B. The following parameters will be displayed for all installed system points whenever a "System Report" is requested: 1. Custom 20 character detector/module label. 2. Detector/module type. 3. Detector sensitivity. 4. Control -by -Event equation assignments. 5. Waterflow Zone select. 6. Supervisory Zone select. 7. Verified Detector select. 8. Silenceable Indicating Circuit. C. The following parameters may be defined in the field for any of the system points, and will become a permanent part of the individual point identification. These data will be automatically displayed whenever the particular point is in the alarm or trouble mode, or whenever a "Point Status" or "System Report" is requested by the operator: 1. Custom 20 character detector/module label. 2. Detector/module type. 3. Detector sensitivity. 4. Control -by -Event equation assignments. 5. Waterflow Zone select. 6. Supervisory Zone select. 7. Verified Detector select. 8. Silenceable Indicating Circuit. D. The system shall be able to perform the following point status diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment to make the readings. Each point will be annunciated for the parameters listed: 1. Detectors a. Device Status b. Device Type C. Custom Device Label (20 character minimum) 16723-7 d. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) e. Time and Date f. Device Address g. SLC Loop Number 2. Control Modules a. Device Status b. Device Type C. Custom Device Label (20 character minimum) d. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) e. Time and Date f. Device Address g. SLC Loop Number 3. Monitor Modules a. Device Status b. Device Type C. Custom Device Label (20 character minimum) d. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) e. Time and Date f. Device Address g. SLC Loop Number 4. Software Zones a. Software Zone Status b. Software Zone Type C. Software'Zone Label (20 character minimum) -- d. Time and Date E. Upon the receipt of an alarm condition from any point in the system, the following information shall be displayed. 1. Modules a. Module Type b. Custom Module Label (20 character minimum) C. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) d. Time and Date e. Module Address f. SLC Loop Number �-, 2. Detectors a. Detector Type b. Custom Detector Label (20 character minimum) C. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) d. Time and Date e. Detector Address f. SLC Loop Number F. Upon the receipt of a trouble condition from any point in the system, the following information shall be displayed. 1. Modules a. Type of Trouble Condition b. Invalid Reply C. Open Circuit d. Short Circuit e. Point Trouble f. Device Type g. Custom Device Label (20 character minimum) �- h. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) i. Time and Date 16723-8 j. Device Address k. SLC Loop Number 2. Detectors a. Type of Trouble Condition b. Invalid Reply C. Maintenance Required d. Low Chamber Value e. Device Type f. Custom Device Label (20 character minimum) g. Software Zone Label (20 character minimum) h. Time and Date i. Device Address j. SLC Loop Number G. Upon the receipt of a Global , or System -Wide trouble condition, the following information shall be displayed. 1. Device Status 2. Specific Trouble Message 3. Time and Date of Trouble Condition 4. Trouble Index Code H. Upon command from a password -authorized operator of the system, the following reports will be generated, and displayed: 1. "System Configuration Report" a. The number of SLC Loops in the system. b. The Operating Style of each installed Loop. c. The Alarm Verification Time for the System d. The Signal Silence Inhibit Time for the system e. The Automatic Signal Silence Time f. The Supervisory Status of the CRT g. CRT status line function h. Local Piezo signal function. is Local Mode Module and Detector functionality. I. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall contain a History Buffer which will be capable of storing up to 400 system output/input/control activations. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation, until a password authorized operator requests that the contents be either displayed, or printed. J. The contents of the History Buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, and the actual number of. activations may also be displayed and or printed. K. History Buffer Reports (whether Displayed or Printed), will be instantly distinguishable from all other displayed or printed system reports through the use of a semicolon in the time/date stamp of the data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE A. Duct detectors alarm and power detector shall supply/return a tubes. DETECTORS: shall be 24 VDC analog type wtih visual indicators, and a reset switch. Each be installed upon the composite it ducts with properly sized sampling 16723-9 B. Provide each detector with a remote test station with key lock and alarm LED. The test station shall be a Notifier Series BRKRM851DH or equal. C. Duct detectors shall be Notifier Model Number A' DH-500-AC/DC or equal. 2.02 MONITOR MODULES: �- A. Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any N.O. dry contact device, including 4-wire smoke detectors), to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. B. The Monitor Module shall mount directly into the Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. The Monitor module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the Fire Alarm.Control Panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. D. The monitor module to be Notifier Model Number MMX-1 or equal. 2.03 CONTROL MODULES:, A. Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional Indicating Appliance Circuit (IAC) of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Indicating Appliances. B. The Control Module shall mount directly in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y IAC (Up to 48 - Watts of Audio Speaker or l Amp of A/V Signal) operation, or as a Dry Contact (Form C) Relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or IACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. Audio/Visual or Speaker Power shall be provided by a separate supervised Power Loop from the main Fire Alarm Control Panel. D. The Control Module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the Control Panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational and is in regular communication with the Control Panel. E. The Control Module shall be Notifier Model No CMX-1 or equal. 16723-10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Installation of the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturersControl Panel Installation Manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. B. All Equipment shall be attached to,a non load -bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. C. Each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the system point(s)/zone(s) shall be as defined by the Owner. D. All wiring to monitor modules and control modules shall be executed to insure proper operation of existing devices and zones. E. Provide all labor and necessary materials for the removal of the existing fire alarm panel and the complete installation of the new control panel. Patch wall to match existing if necessary. 3.02 CABLE AND WIRING: A.. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all.equipment. Unless otherwise specified within the Installation Manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 Type TFN (solid) or #14 Type THHN/THWN in separate conduit, maximum 40% full, and -shall be approved for use as Fire Alarm cable. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the Control Panel; Equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All Electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B.' The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to the existing fire alarm control panel circuit. Conduit shall enter into the Fire Alarm Control Panel backbox only at those areas of the backbox which have factory conduit knockouts. C. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open 16723-11 circuits in the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition. D. All cable shall be ran in conduit from devices to control panel. E. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. ^ F. Cable for Addressable/Intelligent Alarm Initiating Appliances (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, Smoke Detectors, etc.) shall be installed from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to all devices in that Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop. The connection and continuity of the wires which make up that SLC loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. 3.03 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a Factory -Trained Distributor in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner's Representative. B. The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's Representative and the local AHJ. C. The Distributor shall make available contracted periodic system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services. 3.04 ON -SITE SERVICES: A. The Distributor shall provide the on -site services of an Authorized, Factory Trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of -the system during installation phase. B. The Distributor shall provide comprehensive Training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed Fire Alarm System to the Building Owner's Representative, the the local AHJ. C. The distributor shall provide programming for the entire system in accordance wtih the Owner's criteria. 3.05 WARRANTY: A. Provide a service contract to guarantee response to a trouble call within 24 hours after receipt of such a call. B. Provide to the Owner an authorized and trained service representative who will provide maintenance during normal working hours at no cost to the Owner for a period of J.. twelve months from the date of acceptance. End of Section 16723-12 SECTION 16920 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental.to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: A. Furnish motor control centers as shown, scheduled and specified of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or Gould manufacture; equal in all respects to General Electric 7700 line control centers. B. Classification: Class I, Type A per NEMA Publication "Industrial Control No. IC1-1965, Part 22." C. Construction: Totally enclosed, adequately ventilated, free-standing, self-supporting; consisting of structures bolted together to forma continuous unit divided into compartmented sections, each separated by steel barriers; NEMA 1 enclosure: pullbox at top; pullbox at bottom. D. Units shall*be front mounted only, suitable for installation against a wall. E. Entire assembly shall be anchored to two 4-inch channel iron sills leveled and grouted flush into the top of a 6-inch high concrete base. F. Finish: All hardware provided with suitable protective finish. All metal surfaces chemically cleaned and treated to provide bond between paint and metal; entire outer surface of board and pullbox primed and then factory painted two coats of gray lacquer. G. Buses: Hard drawn, 98 percent conductivity copper or high strength aluminum, Grade EC flat rectangular bars, with all connections bolted or welded; all contact surfaces of buses silver plated. If aluminum bus is used, use Belleville spring washers at all bolted joints, pulled to adequate compression by torque wrench calibrated to specific foot-pound requirements of manufacturer. 16920-1 H. Vertical buses in each section, 300 amperes capacity. I. Horizontal main buses as scheduled. J. Braced for 42,OOO amperes RMS symmetrical. K. Continuous ground bus extending through and connected to each section. L. Incoming Line Compartment: Incoming feeder shall be cable as scheduled, terminating in terminal compartment. �.- M. Starter units shall be combination starter and fused switch .units. Fused switches shall be heavy duty interrupter switches equal to General Electric Type QMR, equipped with Bussman Low Peak or equal fuses. '^ N. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches as scheduled on drawings. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. O. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. P. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. Q. Identification: Provide adjacent to each protective device and control unit a laminated, white core, beveled edge plastic engraved nameplate designating the function of the device. R. Shop Drawings: Submit for review before beginning fabrication; indicate dimensions, type and gauge of materials; methods of construction; number, type, size and characteristics of all protective devices, starters, etc.; number, size, type and arrangement of all buses; rating of bus bracing; any other data needed to determine compliance with specifications and drawings. End of Section 16920-2 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SPECIAL CONDITIONS -43- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART I. AIRPORT OPERATIONS SECURITY A. General Airport security is a vital part of the Contractor's responsibilities during the course of this project. Airport security, nationwide, has come under close scrutiny in the last few years. The following security guidelines and the rules and regulations of the Lubbock International Airport Police Department (LIAPD) and the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) shall be followed by the Contractor and the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and representatives at all times during the execution of this project. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for any and all fines or penalties levied against the Airport as a result of any breach of security or safety caused by the Contractor or the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives. B. Airport Operations Area (AOA)/Terminal The Airport operations area (AOA) shall be defined as any portion of the Airport property normally secured against unauthorized entry. The AOA includes all areas specifically reserved for the operations of aircraft and aircraft support equipment and"personnel. Generally, the AOA is defined by the Airport's outer security fencing and other security measures at the Airport terminal building. C. LIAPD - Issued Security Badggs The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a photo -identification security badge issued by the LIAPD for each ,�. supervisor or foreman of each work crew working within the AOA or terminal work area. The Contractor shall obtain LIAPD security badges for at least one member of each work crew working in separate areas of the AOA or terminal building or terminal building. It is the intent of these specifications that all individuals responsible to the Contractor, including the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers or '- representatives, either obtain and display an LIAPD security badge or obtain and display a Contractor -issued identification badge, as specified below, AND be escorted or directly supervised by an individual displaying a current LIAPD security badge. The Contractor may obtain LIAPD security badges from the Lubbock International Airport Police Department at the Lubbock International Airport. The LIAPD reserves the right to limit the number of security badges issued to the Contractor. The LIAPD will charge the Contractor a twenty-five dollar ($25.00) fee for each'. �- security badge issued. An additional fee will be charged, as noted later in this section, for lost or destroyed badges. SC - 1 The LIAPD security badges shall be worn in an easily visible location on the person issued the badge at all times while working within the AOA or secured area. The badge holder shall be familiar with and shall obey all security and safety rules and regulations. The LIAPD security badge may be confiscated and all security rights revoked by the LIAPD upon the breach of any security or safety regulations at the discretion of the LIAPD. The holder of an LIAPD security badge shall surrender the badge at the completion of this project, upon transfer or termination of employment, or at any other time at the request of the LIAPD. The Contractor shall conduct a background check of each applicant for an LIAPD security badge utilizing standard background check forms provided by the LIAPD. The Contractor shall be responsible for completing the required forms, and for submitting the forms to the LIAPD for their review as early in the project as possible to avoid any construction delays. Forms for completing the required background check shall be available through the LIAPD office after award of the project. The background check will show proof of a minimum five (5) year employment record and will be reviewed by the LIAPD. The_LIAPD shall be responsible for reviewing the background checks. Only persons whose application is approved by the LIAPD shall be issued security badges. The LIAPD reserves the right to bar from the AOA or terminal any individuals found by the background check to be, in the opinion of the LIAPD, a risk to AOA/terminal security or safety. At the completion of this project, the Contractor shall return all LIAPD-issued security badges to the LIAPD. The LIAPD will charge an additional twenty-five dollar ($25.00) fee for each lost or destroyed LIAPD-issued security badge. All LIAPD-issued security badges must be accounted for and surrendered at the completion of this project. Failure to account for and surrender all LIAPD-issued security badges will constitute grounds for withholding retainage from the final pay estimate amount. D. Contractor -Issued Identification Badges The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of each of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and representatives while these individuals operate within the secured area. The Contractor shall be responsible for issuing identification badges to each of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and representatives operating within the AOA or terminal secure area. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all persons issued a Contractor's identification badge. This record shall include the home address and telephone number of each person issued a badge. The Contractor's record of all employees issued an.identification badge shall be made available upon the request of -the LIAPD, the Director of Aviation or the Engineer. SC - 2 The format and content of the Contractor -issued identification badge shall be approved by the LIAPD prior to issuing. The identification badge shall display the Contractor's company name, the employee's name, and the badge's effective and expiration dates, and shall be plastic -laminated with a clip -on or pin -on method of attaching the badge to the holder's outer clothing. The identification badge shall be worn in an easily �., visible location on the person issued the badge at all times while operating within the AOA. Contractor -issued identification badge shall not be transferable from individual to individual, but shall be issued to and carried by the specific employee, subcontractor, supplier to representative, issued the badge. The Contractor -issued identification badges shall be renewed by the Contractor every thirty (30) days during the project construction period. The Contractor shall be responsible for all Contractor -issued identification badges. All expired identification badges or badges invalidated by termination of the holder's employment, completion of construction activities, or other reasons, shall be confiscated by the Contractor and retained by the Contractor until the end of °^ the project. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to record and account for all Contractor -issued identification badges. All identification badges issued by the Contractor during the project and the records of said badges shall be transferred to the possession of the LIAPD at the completion of the project. The Contractor -issued identification badge does not allow unlimited access to all areas within the AOA or terminal, but will permit only escorted or directly supervised access to only those portions of the AOA/terminal under construction by the Contractor. - Every individual operating within the AOA shall display either an LIAPD-issued security badge or a Contractor -issued identification badge at all times. All individual employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives, or groups of employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives, must be escorted or directly supervised by an individual bearing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge at all times while within the AOA. Persons within the AOA not possessing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge, or escorted or directly supervised by an individual possessing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge, shall be considered in violation of LIAPD security requirements and shall be subject to immediate removal from the AOA and any other disciplinary actions necessitated by LIAPD security arrangements. E. Contractor's Entrance Gate The Contractor shall provide an entrance gate to the AOA for the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and representatives at a location directed by the Engineer. This entrance gate shall be provided, installed, and at the end of all construction activities, shall be removed, and the existing fence SC - 3 reinstalled to the satisfaction of the Engineer, by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. Adjacent to the Contractor's entrance gate, outside the AOA, the Contractor shall provide a parking area for the Contractor's. employee's,personal automobiles. This area may also be used for storage of the Contractor's equipment and materials. The limits of this parking/storage area shall be as directed by the Engineer. At the completion of this project, any damage done by the Contractor to this storage area shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs shall include, but not be limited to, regrading and reseeding any damaged areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall control all movement through the Contractor's entrance gate. Only authorized personnel and vehicles shall be allowed to enter the AOA through this gate. When not in immediate use by the Contractor, the gate shall be securely locked by the Contractor to prevent entrance by unauthorized persons or vehicles. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Director of Aviation and the LIAPD with duplicate keys (for key locks) or combinations (for combination locks) to the lock or locks used to secure the, Contractor's entrance gate to the AOA. If construction activities, such as hauling materials, require that the Contractor's entrance gate to the AOA remain open for long periods of time, the Contractor may, upon approval from the Engineer, leave the gate open and provide a full-time watchguard at the gate. The watchguard shall be approved for and shall possess an LIAPD-issued security badge. If this security arrangement is desired and approved, the gate shall be manned by the watchguard as long as the gate remains open. The watchguard shall be the Contractor's representative and shall be responsible for all movement through the gate. Again, only authorized persons and vehicles shall be allowed by the Contractor's watchguard to enter the AOA. At the Contractor's option, and upon approval of the Engineer, an automatic gate operator may be installed in lieu of providing a watchguard. F. Vehicle Escorts All vehicles responsible to the Contractor, such as supplier's vehicles, entering the AOA shall be escorted by an approved Contractor escort vehicle from the point of AOA entry to the Construction site. The escort vehicle shall be clearly identified with standard FAA markings and/or FAA flags. In addition, the escort vehicle shall be marked with the Contractor's name. The escort vehicle will be responsible for leading supply, delivery or other vehicles across the active airfield. To facilitate safe movement of the escort vehicle and the.escorted vehicles, the driver of the escort vehicle shall be approved for, SC - 4 shall be issued, and shall display an LIAPD security badge. Further, the escort vehicle driver shall be familiar with airport security and safety procedures. The escort vehicle shall be equipped with an FAA radio, as specified herein, and the driver of the escort vehicle shall be familiar with the FAA radio and its operation, and shall obey all instructions from the Air Traffic Control Tower. G. Challenging Unauthorized Personnel or Vehicles The Contractor and the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers, and representatives who have been issued an LIAPD security badge shall be responsible for challenging any person or vehicle found on the AOA or other non public areas, who. ..� is not displaying a valid LIAPD security badges, cannot produce a valid LIAPD security badge, or who is not under escort or under the direct supervision of a person possessing a valid LIAPD security badge. The challenge shall consist of notifying the person that he is within a restricted area, and informing the person of an appropriate exit route. Should the unauthorized person refuse to exit the restricted area, the LIAPD shall be immediately notified �^ for further action, and the unauthorized person shall be kept under surveillance until the LIAPD arrive. Any expired or altered badge, or any badge bearing a photograph not matching the bearer, shall be brought to the attention of the LIAPD and shall be immediately confiscated by the LIAPD or the Director of Aviation. H. Barricades, Signs, and Hazard Markincts -- The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary barricades, signs, danger signals, and lights for the protection of the work and the safety of the public for both land and air traffic. Before closing existing apron, runways or taxiway, warning signs for air traffic shall be placed at such locations and shall be visible day and night. A runway closed because of construction or other activities or hazards shall have appropriate FAA standard markings. Any movement of Contractor's vehicles or equipment on or across landing areas shall carry FAA standard markings or flags. Taxiways closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades. Suitable warning signs illuminated at night by acceptable light units, shall be provided for closed runways apron, taxiways and roadways. Obstructions shall be illuminated at night. All warning lights shall be equipped with photocell controls to automatically turn on the lights at night and turn them off at daytime. The lights shall be checked regularly by the Contractor to assure that batteries or power cells are in working order. SC - 5 PART II. CRANES AND HOISTS A. Any construction activity utilizing a crane or any other hoisting device shall have a prior, written approval of the Federal Aviation Administration. The Contractor shall be responsible for filing the prescribed forms for airspace clearance in accordance with Part 77 of.the Federal Aviation Regulations. Applications for airspace clearance must be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to the beginning of construction activities. To avoid construction delays, the Contractor is urged'to file the prescribed forms in a timely manner. Airspace clearance from the FAA must be approved prior to the erection of the crane or other hoisting device. B. Notice of Proposed Construction or Alterations, FAA form 7460-1, can be obtained from the Flight Standards District Office located at the West Airport District. C. When requesting approval for the use of a crane or other hoisting device, the following information is required: 1. Exact location of construction activities utilizing a crane or other hoisting device. 2. Maximum extendable height of crane or other hoisting device. 3. Duration of construction activities utilizing a crane or other hoisting device. 4. Daily hours of crane or other hoisting device operation. The top of the crane or other hoisting device shall be marked with a 3-foot by 3-foot safety -orange and white checkered flag. The crane or other hoisting device shall be lowered at night or at the conclusion of construction activities, or during periods of poor visibility (ILS conditions) as directed by the Director of Aviation or the Engineer, or at any other time at the direction of the Director of Aviation or the Engineer. D. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Director of Aviation at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to actual erection of the crane or other hoisting device. E., The Lubbock International Airport has a one hundred and fifty (150) foot cap above which nothing may extend. SC - 6 Office of Purchasing City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 806-767-2167 January 11, 1991 ARMSTRONG MECHANICAL CO., INC. ATTN: WOODY MARTIN P.O. BOX 3430 LUBBOCK, TX 79452 SUBJECT: HVAC Renvoation - Lubbock International Airport The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the 18th day of December, 1990, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: City of Lubbock Bid # 109431 HVAC Renovation -Lubbock International Airport as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the January 10, 1991, at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of -, Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute -- and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Gene Eads, C.P.M. Purchasing Manager (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) .1 '